Trusted Business
Verified & Licensed
Virus Free Files
100% Safe Downloads
Secure Payment
SSL Protected
Instant Delivery
Available Immediately
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
$37.95
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Instant PDF Download
Available immediately
Save to Your Device
Download & keep forever
Antivirus Scanned
100% virus-free
Trusted Worldwide
175,000+ customers
Description
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FILE DETAILS:
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Language : English
Pages : 4367
Downloadable : Yes
File Type : PDF
IMAGES PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
DESCRIPTION:
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FOREWORD:
- This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2007 INFINITI FX35/FX45.
- In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task.
- All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NBS004IP
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
2007 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
fwd............................................................................................................................. 1 Exit........................................................................................................................ 0 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 1 FOREWORD.................................................................................................................... 2 QUICK REFERENCE CHART....................................................................................................... 3 A: GENERAL INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 0 GI - General Information................................................................................................ 0 B: ENGINE................................................................................................................... 0 EM - Engine Mechanical.................................................................................................. 0 LU - Engine Lubrication System.......................................................................................... 0 CO - Engine Cooling System.............................................................................................. 0 EC - Engine Control System.............................................................................................. 0 FL - Fuel System........................................................................................................ 0 EX - Exhaust System..................................................................................................... 0 ACC - Accelerator Control System........................................................................................ 0 C: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE................................................................................................... 0 AT - Automatic Transmission............................................................................................. 0 D: DRIVELINE/AXLE........................................................................................................... 0 TF - Transfer........................................................................................................... 0 PR - Propeller Shaft.................................................................................................... 0 FFD - Front Final Drive................................................................................................. 0 RFD - Rear Final Drive.................................................................................................. 0 FAX - Front Axle........................................................................................................ 0 RAX - Rear Axle......................................................................................................... 0 E: SUSPENSION............................................................................................................... 0 FSU - Front Suspension.................................................................................................. 0 RSU - Rear Suspension................................................................................................... 0 WT - Road Wheels & Tires................................................................................................ 0 F: BRAKES................................................................................................................... 0 BR - Brake System....................................................................................................... 0 PB - Parking Brake System............................................................................................... 0 BRC - Brake Control System.............................................................................................. 0 G: STEERING................................................................................................................. 0 PS - Power Steering System.............................................................................................. 0 H: RESTRAINTS............................................................................................................... 0 SB - Seat Belts......................................................................................................... 0 SRS - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)............................................................................... 0 I: BODY..................................................................................................................... 0 BL - Body, Lock & Security System....................................................................................... 0 GW - Glasses, Window System & Mirrors................................................................................... 0 RF - Roof............................................................................................................... 0 EI - Exterior & Interior................................................................................................ 0 IP - Instrument Panel................................................................................................... 0 SE - Seat............................................................................................................... 0 J: AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................... 0 ATC - Automatic Air Conditioner......................................................................................... 0 K: ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 0 SC - Starting & Charging System......................................................................................... 0 LT - Lighting System.................................................................................................... 0 DI - Driver Information System.......................................................................................... 0 WW - Wiper, Washer & Horn............................................................................................... 0 BCS - Body Control System............................................................................................... 0 LAN - LAN System........................................................................................................ 0 AV - Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System........................................................................ 0 ACS - Auto Cruise Control System........................................................................................ 0 PG - Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements............................................................................ 0 L: MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 0 MA - Maintenance........................................................................................................ 0 M: INDEX.................................................................................................................... 1 IDX - Alphabetical Index................................................................................................ 1 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT................................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS............................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)............................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)............................................................................................. 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX............................................................................................ 80 acc............................................................................................................................. 6 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 7 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 7 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 8 Components.......................................................................................................... 8 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 8 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 8 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 8 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION................................................................................... 8 acs............................................................................................................................. 10 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 10 ASCD.................................................................................................................... 12 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)............................................................................... 12 Description..................................................................................................... 12 ICC..................................................................................................................... 13 PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................................... 13 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”..................... 13 Precautions for ICC System Service.............................................................................. 13 PREPARATION......................................................................................................... 14 Special Service Tools........................................................................................... 14 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 15 Outline......................................................................................................... 15 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 15 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 15 BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION)........................................................................ 15 Functional Diagram.............................................................................................. 16 Components Description.......................................................................................... 18 CAN Communication............................................................................................... 18 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT...................................................................................... 18 Switch Operation................................................................................................ 19 ICC System Display.............................................................................................. 19 ACTION TEST......................................................................................................... 20 ICC System Running Test......................................................................................... 20 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 20 Set Checking............................................................................................ 20 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Cancellation Of Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode (Normal Driving Condition) In ....... 20 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode Before Cancella....... 20 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 20 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 21 Check For Distance Switch............................................................................... 21 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 21 Set Checking............................................................................................ 21 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Cancellation Of Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode (Normal Driving Conditio....... 22 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode Before IC....... 22 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 22 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 22 LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................ 23 Outline......................................................................................................... 23 Preparation..................................................................................................... 23 Outline of Adjustment Procedure................................................................................. 23 Setting the ICC Target Board.................................................................................... 23 ADJUSTING HEIGHT OF THE TARGET.............................................................................. 23 ADJUSTING THE RIGHT-LEFT POSITION OF THE TARGET............................................................. 24 SETTING THE TARGET.......................................................................................... 24 Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................... 26 CHECK AFTER THE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................. 27 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION........................................................................................... 28 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.................................................................. 28 WIRING DIAGRAM...................................................................................................... 29 Schematic....................................................................................................... 29 Wiring Diagram — ICC —.......................................................................................... 30 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE....................................................................................... 37 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Unit...................................................................... 37 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Sensor.................................................................... 38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................. 39 Work Flow....................................................................................................... 39 CONSULT-II Function (ICC)....................................................................................... 40 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 40 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................. 40 WORK SUPPORT................................................................................................ 41 Work Item............................................................................................... 41 Cause of Auto-Cancel.................................................................................... 41 Laser Beam Adjust....................................................................................... 41 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..................................................................................... 41 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................ 42 Operation Procedure..................................................................................... 42 Monitored Item.......................................................................................... 42 ACTIVE TEST................................................................................................. 44 ICC BUZZER 1............................................................................................ 44 METER LAMP.............................................................................................. 44 STOP LAMP............................................................................................... 44 BOOSTER SOL/V 3......................................................................................... 45 Self-Diagnostic Function........................................................................................ 46 WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................................. 46 WITHOUT CONSULT-II.......................................................................................... 46 Self-Diagnostic Erasing Method.......................................................................... 47 SELF-DIAGNOSIS BY ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY WILL NOT RUN........................................................... 48 Possible Irregular Condition............................................................................ 48 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS......................................................................... 51 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart............................................................................. 51 DTC 11 CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................. 53 DTC 20 CAN COMM CIRCUIT......................................................................................... 53 DTC 31 POWER SUPPLY CIR, DTC 34 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2.............................................................. 53 DTC 41 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC....................................................................................... 54 DTC 43 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC......................................................................................... 55 DTC 45 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW....................................................................................... 55 DTC 46 OPERATION SW CIRC........................................................................................ 57 DTC 61 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 59 DTC 62 BOOSTER SOL/V CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 60 DTC 63 RELEASE SW CIRCUIT....................................................................................... 61 DTC 65 PRESSURE CONTROL......................................................................................... 63 DTC 74 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR...................................................................................... 64 DTC 90 STOP LAMP RLY FIX........................................................................................ 64 DTC 92 ECM CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 70 DTC 96 NP RANGE................................................................................................. 71 DTC 97 AT CIRCUIT............................................................................................... 73 DTC 98 GEAR POSITION............................................................................................ 73 DTC 102 RADAR STAIN............................................................................................. 74 DTC 103 LASER SENSOR FAIL....................................................................................... 74 DTC 104 LASER AIMING INCMP...................................................................................... 75 DTC 107 LASER COMM FAIL......................................................................................... 75 DTC 109 LASER HIGH TEMP......................................................................................... 75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS...................................................................................... 76 Symptom Chart................................................................................................... 76 Symptom 1: MAIN Switch Does Not Turn ON*1,MAIN Swich Does Not Turn OFF*2........................................ 77 Symptom 2: ICC System Cannot Be Set (MAIN Switch Turns ON/OFF).................................................. 77 Symptom 3: ICC System Cannot Be Operated by CANCEL Switch, RESUME/ ACCELERATE Switch or DISTANCE ............... 78 Symptom 4: ICC System Is Not Cancelled When the A/T Selector Lever Is in Other Than “D” and “M” P............... 79 Symptom 5: Chime Does Not Sound................................................................................. 79 Symptom 6: Driving Force Is Hunting............................................................................. 80 Symptom 7: ICC System Frequently Cannot Detect the Vehicle Ahead/ Detection Zone Is Short....................... 80 Symptom 8: The System Does Not Detect the Vehicle Ahead at All.................................................. 81 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSPECTION..................................................................................... 82 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 82 Booster Solenoid................................................................................................ 82 Release Switch.................................................................................................. 82 ICC Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch........................................................................... 83 ICC Brake Hold Relay............................................................................................ 83 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 84 ICC Unit........................................................................................................ 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 84 ICC Sensor...................................................................................................... 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 85 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 85 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 at.............................................................................................................................. 86 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 86 INDEX FOR DTC........................................................................................................... 90 Alphabetical Index.................................................................................................. 90 DTC No. Index....................................................................................................... 91 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 92 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 92 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine.................................................. 92 Precautions......................................................................................................... 93 Service Notice or Precautions....................................................................................... 94 ATF COOLER SERVICE.............................................................................................. 94 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS........................................................................................... 94 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 95 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 95 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 96 A/T FLUID............................................................................................................... 97 Changing A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 97 Checking A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 98 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning........................................................................................... 100 A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE............................................................................. 100 A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE............................................................................ 101 A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................... 102 A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION............................................................................... 102 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 103 Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)................................................................................... 103 Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)........................................................................ 104 Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)........................................................................ 105 Shift Mechanism..................................................................................................... 106 CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................... 106 FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE.................................................................................... 106 CLUTCH AND BAND CHART........................................................................................... 107 POWER TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................. 108 “N” Position................................................................................................ 108 “P” Position................................................................................................ 108 “D1"Position................................................................................................ 109 “M1” Position............................................................................................... 110 “D2"Position................................................................................................ 111 “M2” Position............................................................................................... 112 “D3"and"M3"Positions........................................................................................ 113 “D4"and"M4"Positions........................................................................................ 114 “D5"and"M5"Positions........................................................................................ 115 “R” Position................................................................................................ 116 TCM Function........................................................................................................ 117 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE.......................................................................................... 117 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 117 CAN Communication................................................................................................... 118 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 118 Input/Output Signal of TCM.......................................................................................... 118 Line Pressure Control............................................................................................... 119 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN.................................. 119 Normal Control.............................................................................................. 119 Back-up Control (Engine Brake).............................................................................. 119 During Shift Change......................................................................................... 120 At Low Fluid Temperature.................................................................................... 120 Shift Control....................................................................................................... 120 SHIFT CHANGE.................................................................................................... 120 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 121 BLIPPING CONTROL................................................................................................ 121 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 121 Lock-up Control..................................................................................................... 122 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL................................................................... 122 Lock-up Control System Diagram.............................................................................. 122 Lock-up Released............................................................................................ 122 Lock-up Applied............................................................................................. 122 SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL.......................................................................................... 122 Half-clutched State......................................................................................... 122 Slip Lock-up Control........................................................................................ 122 Engine Brake Control................................................................................................ 123 Control Valve....................................................................................................... 123 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................... 123 FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 124 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM........................................................................................ 125 Introduction........................................................................................................ 125 OBD-II Function for A/T System...................................................................................... 125 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II........................................................................... 125 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 125 TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 125 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)................................................................................ 125 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC................................................................................ 125 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data............................................................ 126 HOW TO ERASE DTC................................................................................................ 126 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II).............................................................................. 127 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)..................................................................................... 128 HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)..................................................................................... 128 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................................................................... 128 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 128 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 129 DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................................................................... 129 Fail-safe........................................................................................................... 129 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 129 Vehicle Speed Sensor........................................................................................ 129 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor........................................................................... 129 Throttle Position Sensor.................................................................................... 129 PNP Switch.................................................................................................. 129 Starter Relay............................................................................................... 129 A/T Interlock............................................................................................... 130 A/T 1st Engine Braking...................................................................................... 130 Line Pressure Solenoid...................................................................................... 130 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid............................................................................ 130 Low Coast Brake Solenoid.................................................................................... 130 Input Clutch Solenoid....................................................................................... 130 Direct Clutch Solenoid...................................................................................... 130 Front Brake Solenoid........................................................................................ 130 High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid........................................................................ 130 Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2............................................................................ 130 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 131 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 131 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 131 Work Flow Chart............................................................................................. 132 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET............................................................................................ 132 Information from Customer................................................................................... 132 Diagnostic Worksheet Chart.................................................................................. 133 A/T Electrical Parts Location....................................................................................... 136 Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................... 137 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................ 138 A/T CHECK....................................................................................................... 138 A/T Fluid Leakage and A/T Fluid Level Check................................................................. 138 A/T Fluid Condition Check................................................................................... 138 STALL TEST...................................................................................................... 138 Stall Test Procedure........................................................................................ 138 Judgement of Stall Test..................................................................................... 139 LINE PRESSURE TEST.............................................................................................. 139 Line Pressure Test Port..................................................................................... 139 Line Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................ 139 Line Pressure............................................................................................... 140 Judgement of Line Pressure Test............................................................................. 141 ROAD TEST....................................................................................................... 141 Description................................................................................................. 141 Check Before Engine Is Started...................................................................................... 142 Check at Idle....................................................................................................... 142 Cruise Test - Part 1................................................................................................ 143 Cruise Test - Part 2................................................................................................ 145 Cruise Test - Part 3................................................................................................ 146 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 147 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 148 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 Symptom Chart....................................................................................................... 149 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values............................................................................ 174 A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT.................................................................. 174 TCM INSPECTION TABLE............................................................................................ 174 CONSULT-II Function (A/T)........................................................................................... 175 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 175 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE...................................................................................... 175 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE.................................................................................... 177 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE..................................................................................... 177 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 177 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 177 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................ 180 DATA MONITOR MODE............................................................................................... 180 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 180 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 180 CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE............................................................................. 184 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 184 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE........................................................................................... 184 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 184 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 186 Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II............................................................................. 187 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)..................................................................... 187 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)..................................................................... 187 TCM SEL......................................................................................................... 187 Description................................................................................................. 187 Diagnostic Procedure........................................................................................ 187 Judgement Self-diagnosis Code............................................................................... 188 Erase Self-diagnosis........................................................................................ 188 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................ 189 Description......................................................................................................... 189 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 189 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 189 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 189 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 189 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 189 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN........................................................................................... 190 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 191 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT.......................................................................................... 192 Description......................................................................................................... 192 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 192 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 192 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 192 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 192 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 192 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG......................................................................................... 193 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 194 DTC P0700 TCM........................................................................................................... 196 Description......................................................................................................... 196 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 196 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 196 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 196 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 196 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 196 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 196 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.................................................................................. 197 Description......................................................................................................... 197 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 197 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 197 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 197 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 197 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 197 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 197 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW........................................................................................ 198 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 199 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR..................................................................................... 201 Description......................................................................................................... 201 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 201 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 201 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 201 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 201 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 201 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 201 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 202 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR).................................................................. 203 Description......................................................................................................... 203 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 203 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 203 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 203 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 203 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 203 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 204 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T........................................................................................ 205 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 206 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL........................................................................................... 208 Description......................................................................................................... 208 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 208 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 208 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 208 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 209 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE........................................................................ 210 Description......................................................................................................... 210 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 210 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 210 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 210 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 210 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 210 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 210 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 211 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)................................................................................ 212 Description......................................................................................................... 212 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 212 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 212 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 212 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 212 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 212 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 213 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 214 Description......................................................................................................... 214 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 214 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 214 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 214 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 214 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 214 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 214 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 215 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR...................................................................................... 216 Description......................................................................................................... 216 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 216 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 216 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 216 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 216 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 216 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 217 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT.......................................................................... 219 Description......................................................................................................... 219 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 219 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 219 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 219 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 219 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 219 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS........................................................................................... 220 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 221 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 223 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1.................................................................................. 223 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2.................................................................................. 223 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR...................................................................................... 224 Description......................................................................................................... 224 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 224 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 224 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 224 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 224 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 224 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 225 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 226 Description......................................................................................................... 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 226 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 226 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 226 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 226 Judgement of A/T Interlock.......................................................................................... 226 A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE............................................................................ 227 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 227 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING........................................................................................ 229 Description......................................................................................................... 229 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 229 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 229 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 229 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 229 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 229 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 230 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................... 231 Description......................................................................................................... 231 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 231 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 231 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 231 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 231 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 232 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION.......................................................................... 233 Description......................................................................................................... 233 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 233 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 233 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 233 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 234 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 234 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................... 235 Description......................................................................................................... 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 235 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 235 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 235 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 235 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 236 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................................... 237 Description......................................................................................................... 237 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 237 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 237 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 237 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 237 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 237 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 238 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 238 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 239 Description......................................................................................................... 239 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 239 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 239 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 239 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 239 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 239 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 239 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 240 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION......................................................................... 241 Description......................................................................................................... 241 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 241 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 241 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 241 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 242 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 242 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................... 243 Description......................................................................................................... 243 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 243 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 243 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 243 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 243 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 243 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 244 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................... 245 Description......................................................................................................... 245 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 245 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 245 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 245 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 245 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 245 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 246 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 246 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................ 247 Description......................................................................................................... 247 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 247 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 247 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 247 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 247 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 248 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION....................................................................... 249 Description......................................................................................................... 249 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 249 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 249 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 249 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 249 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 249 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 249 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 250 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH............................................................................................ 251 Description......................................................................................................... 251 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode..................................................................... 251 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 251 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 251 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 251 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 251 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW.......................................................................................... 252 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 254 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 255 MANUAL MODE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 255 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1......................................................................................... 256 Description......................................................................................................... 256 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 256 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 256 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 256 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 256 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 256 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 257 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3......................................................................................... 258 Description......................................................................................................... 258 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 258 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 258 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 258 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 258 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 258 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 259 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5......................................................................................... 260 Description......................................................................................................... 260 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 260 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 260 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 260 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 260 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 260 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 261 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6......................................................................................... 262 Description......................................................................................................... 262 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 262 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 262 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 262 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 263 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 264 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN.......................................................................................... 264 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 265 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT........................................................ 268 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 268 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 268 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.................................................................................................... 269 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 269 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 269 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT................................................................................................... 270 Description......................................................................................................... 270 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 270 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 270 A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART..................................................................................... 270 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS.......................................................................................... 271 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC........................................................................................ 271 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........................................................................... 274 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 274 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 274 Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position..................................................................... 275 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 275 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 275 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed.......................................................................... 276 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 276 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 276 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves...................................................................................... 277 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 277 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 277 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)................................................................................... 278 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 278 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 278 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position..................................................................... 281 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 281 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 281 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position...................................................................... 284 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 284 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 284 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1................................................................................... 286 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 286 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 286 A/T Does Not Shift: D1->D2.......................................................................................... 289 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 289 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 289 A/T Does Not Shift: D2->D3.......................................................................................... 291 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 291 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 291 A/T Does Not Shift: D3->D4.......................................................................................... 293 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 293 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 293 A/T Does Not Shift: D4->D5.......................................................................................... 296 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 296 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 296 A/T Does Not Lock-up................................................................................................ 298 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 298 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 298 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition................................................................................. 300 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 300 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 300 Lock-up Is Not Released............................................................................................. 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle................................................................................ 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode.................................................................................... 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear -> 4th Gear............................................................................ 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear -> 3rd Gear............................................................................ 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear -> 2nd Gear............................................................................ 308 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 308 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 308 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear -> 1st Gear............................................................................ 310 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 310 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 310 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake......................................................................... 312 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 312 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 312 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 314 Control Device Removal and Installation............................................................................. 314 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 315 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 315 Control Rod Removal and Installation................................................................................ 315 CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS.......................................................................................... 315 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 316 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 316 Adjustment of A/T Position.......................................................................................... 316 Checking of A/T Position............................................................................................ 316 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM................................................................................................... 317 Description......................................................................................................... 317 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location......................................................................... 317 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT......................................................................................... 318 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 319 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE..................................................................................................... 321 Components.......................................................................................................... 321 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 322 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 322 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 323 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 324 Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2........................................................... 324 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 324 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................ 324 Removal..................................................................................................... 324 Installation................................................................................................ 328 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................... 332 Removal..................................................................................................... 332 Installation................................................................................................ 333 Parking Components (2WD Models Only)................................................................................ 335 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 335 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 336 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 339 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 340 Rear Oil Seal....................................................................................................... 343 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 343 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 343 Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)...................................................................... 344 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 344 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 344 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 347 AIR BREATHER HOSE....................................................................................................... 349 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 349 VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 349 VK45DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 350 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................... 351 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)............................................................................... 351 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 351 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 351 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 352 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 352 I............................................................................................................... 353 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)............................................................................... 354 COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)......................................................................................... 354 COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)......................................................................................... 355 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 355 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 357 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 357 I............................................................................................................... 357 OVERHAUL................................................................................................................ 359 Components.......................................................................................................... 359 Oil Channel......................................................................................................... 373 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings........................................ 376 DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................. 379 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 379 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS.............................................................................................. 397 Oil Pump............................................................................................................ 397 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 397 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 397 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 398 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-way Clutch.................................................................................. 400 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 400 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 400 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 401 3rd One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 401 Front Sun Gear Snap Ring.................................................................................... 401 Front Sun Gear.............................................................................................. 401 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 401 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear..................................................................... 402 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 402 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 404 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 405 Front Carrier Snap Ring..................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Snap Ring...................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Drum........................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Drive Plates................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................. 405 Front Carrier............................................................................................... 406 Rear Internal Gear.......................................................................................... 406 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 406 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub........................................................ 408 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 408 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 409 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring.......................................... 411 1st One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 411 Mid Sun Gear................................................................................................ 411 Rear Sun Gear............................................................................................... 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub............................................................................. 411 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch......................................................................................... 414 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 414 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 415 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring....................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates.............................................. 415 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 415 Direct Clutch....................................................................................................... 417 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 417 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 418 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 418 Direct Clutch Snap Ring..................................................................................... 418 Direct Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................................. 418 Direct Clutch Retaining Plates, Driven Plates and DIsh Plate*............................................... 418 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 418 ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................ 420 Assembly (1)........................................................................................................ 420 Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 434 TOTAL END PLAY.................................................................................................. 434 Assembly (2)........................................................................................................ 437 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 444 General Specifications.............................................................................................. 444 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 444 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 444 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 444 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 445 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 445 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 445 Stall Speed......................................................................................................... 445 Line Pressure....................................................................................................... 445 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 445 Turbine Revolution Sensor........................................................................................... 446 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)........................................................................ 446 Reverse Brake....................................................................................................... 446 Total End Play...................................................................................................... 446 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 atc............................................................................................................................. 448 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 448 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 452 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 452 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 452 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 452 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover................................................................... 453 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...................................................................... 453 CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT........................................................................................ 454 General Refrigerant Precautions..................................................................................... 454 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection.............................................................................. 455 ABOUT ONE-TOUCH JOINT........................................................................................... 455 Description................................................................................................. 455 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..................................................................... 457 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION............................................................................... 458 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 458 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 458 O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications...................................................................... 459 Precautions for Servicing Compressor................................................................................ 460 Precautions for Service Equipment................................................................................... 460 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 460 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR........................................................................................ 460 VACUUM PUMP..................................................................................................... 461 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET.............................................................................................. 461 SERVICE HOSES................................................................................................... 461 SERVICE COUPLERS................................................................................................ 462 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE........................................................................................ 462 CHARGING CYLINDER............................................................................................... 462 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye.................................................................................. 463 IDENTIFICATION.................................................................................................. 463 IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE................................................................................ 463 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 464 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 464 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment....................................................................... 465 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 467 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 468 Refrigerant Cycle................................................................................................... 468 REFRIGERANT FLOW................................................................................................ 468 FREEZE PROTECTION............................................................................................... 468 Refrigerant System Protection....................................................................................... 468 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................................................................................... 468 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................... 468 V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor................................................................................ 469 GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................. 469 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 470 General..................................................................................................... 470 Operation................................................................................................... 471 Component Layout.................................................................................................... 473 LUBRICANT............................................................................................................... 474 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor..................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT....................................................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION...................................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR...................................... 475 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ 476 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL................................................................................................. 477 Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System................................................................... 477 System Construction................................................................................................. 477 OPERATION....................................................................................................... 477 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER........................................................................ 478 Start:...................................................................................................... 478 Address:.................................................................................................... 478 Opening Angle:.............................................................................................. 478 Error Check:................................................................................................ 478 Stop Signal:................................................................................................ 479 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)............................................................ 479 FAN SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................... 479 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 479 MODE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................... 479 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL........................................................................................... 480 SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM........................................................................................... 480 Description of Control System....................................................................................... 481 Control Operation................................................................................................... 481 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................. 482 AUTO SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (DRIVER SIDE)......................................... 482 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (PASSENGER SIDE)...................................... 482 INTAKE SWITCH................................................................................................... 482 DEFROSTER (DEF) SWITCH.......................................................................................... 482 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH..................................................................................... 482 OFF SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 A/C SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 MODE SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 FAN SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 DUAL SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 Fail-safe Function.................................................................................................. 483 Discharge Air Flow.................................................................................................. 484 System Description.................................................................................................. 485 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................................. 485 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 486 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 487 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 487 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................... 487 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 487 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 487 Display Item List........................................................................................... 487 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 487 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 487 SYMPTOM TABLE................................................................................................... 488 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 489 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................. 489 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT........................................................................................... 490 Schematic........................................................................................................... 491 Wiring Diagram — A/C —.............................................................................................. 492 Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value............................................................................. 497 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 497 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP..................................................... 497 Self-diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 499 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 499 FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 500 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER................................................................ 505 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER.............................................................. 506 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION................................................................. 506 Operational Check................................................................................................... 507 CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION........................................................................................ 507 CHECKING BLOWER................................................................................................. 507 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR.......................................................................................... 507 CHECKING INTAKE AIR............................................................................................. 507 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE................................................................................... 507 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE................................................................................... 507 CHECKING A/C SWITCH............................................................................................. 508 CHECKING AUTO MODE.............................................................................................. 508 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp........................................................................ 509 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 509 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 509 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. (Automatic Amplifier)............................................................ 509 Potentio Temperature Control (PTC).......................................................................... 510 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM.............................................................................. 510 LAN System Circuit.................................................................................................. 511 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT............................................................................. 511 Mode Door Motor Circuit............................................................................................. 515 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 515 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 516 Component Parts............................................................................................. 516 System Operation............................................................................................ 516 Mode Door Control Specification............................................................................. 517 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 517 Mode Door Motor............................................................................................. 517 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................... 517 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit.......................................................................................... 518 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 518 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 519 Component Parts............................................................................................. 519 System Operation............................................................................................ 519 Air Mix Door Control Specification.......................................................................... 519 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 520 Air Mix Door Motor.......................................................................................... 520 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................... 520 Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit...................................................................................... 520 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR PBR.................................................................. 520 Intake Door Motor Circuit........................................................................................... 521 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 521 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 522 Component Parts............................................................................................. 522 System Operation............................................................................................ 522 Intake Door Control Specification........................................................................... 522 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 523 Intake Door Motor........................................................................................... 523 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................... 523 Blower Motor Circuit................................................................................................ 524 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 524 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 525 Component Parts............................................................................................. 525 System Operation............................................................................................ 525 Automatic Mode.............................................................................................. 525 Starting Fan Speed Control.................................................................................. 526 Blower Speed Compensation................................................................................... 526 Fan Speed Control Specification............................................................................. 526 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 526 Brush-Less Motor............................................................................................ 526 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................ 526 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 528 Blower Motor................................................................................................ 528 Magnet Clutch Circuit............................................................................................... 529 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 529 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 530 Low Temperature Protection Control.......................................................................... 530 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH........................................................................... 530 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 536 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor................................................................................. 536 Insufficient Cooling................................................................................................ 537 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 537 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................... 539 PERFORMANCE CHART............................................................................................... 541 Test Condition.............................................................................................. 541 Test Reading................................................................................................ 541 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE.......................................................................... 542 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.............................................................. 542 High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low............................................. 542 High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High............................................. 543 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low............................................................... 543 Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative................................................................ 544 Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.......................................................................... 544 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING.................................................................... 544 Insufficient Heating................................................................................................ 546 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 546 Noise............................................................................................................... 547 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 547 Self-diagnosis...................................................................................................... 548 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 548 Memory Function..................................................................................................... 549 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 549 Ambient Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 550 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 550 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 550 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS............................................................................... 550 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................... 550 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 552 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 552 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit........................................................................................... 553 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 553 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 553 Aspirator................................................................................................... 553 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................... 554 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 555 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 555 Sunload Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 556 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 556 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 556 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS........................................................................................... 556 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................... 556 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 558 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 558 Intake Sensor Circuit............................................................................................... 559 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 559 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 559 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................... 559 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 560 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 560 CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................. 561 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 561 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 561 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 561 AUTO AMP................................................................................................................ 562 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp............................................................... 562 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 562 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 562 AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 563 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 563 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 563 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 563 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................................................... 564 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 564 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 564 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 564 SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 565 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 565 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 565 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 565 INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................................................... 566 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 566 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 566 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 566 BLOWER UNIT............................................................................................................. 567 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 567 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 567 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 567 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 568 BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................................................ 569 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 569 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 569 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 569 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................................................... 570 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 570 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 570 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 570 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER.................................................................................................... 571 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 571 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 571 REPLACEMENT TIMING.............................................................................................. 571 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES.......................................................................................... 571 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................... 572 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 572 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 572 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 573 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 575 MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................................................... 577 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 577 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 577 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 577 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................................................... 578 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 578 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 578 Driver Side................................................................................................. 578 Passenger Side.............................................................................................. 578 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 578 HEATER CORE............................................................................................................. 579 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 579 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 579 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 579 DUCTS AND GRILLES....................................................................................................... 580 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 580 COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................................................................ 580 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 580 Removal of Center Ventilator Grilles........................................................................ 580 Removal of Side Ventilation................................................................................. 580 Removal of Rear Ventilator Grilles.......................................................................... 580 Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Ducts and Ventilator Ducts..................................................... 581 Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts............................................................................ 582 Removal of Foot Ducts....................................................................................... 583 Removal of Floor Ducts...................................................................................... 583 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 583 REFRIGERANT LINES....................................................................................................... 584 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure................................................................................. 584 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.......................................................................... 584 Discharging Refrigerant..................................................................................... 584 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant.................................................................. 584 Components.......................................................................................................... 586 VQ35DE.......................................................................................................... 586 VK45DE.......................................................................................................... 587 Removal and Installation of Compressor.............................................................................. 587 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 587 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 587 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 588 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 589 Removal and Installation of......................................................................................... 589 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 589 Overhaul.................................................................................................... 589 Inspection.................................................................................................. 591 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 591 Break-in Operation.......................................................................................... 592 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose.............................................................. 593 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 593 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 594 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible Hose............................................................. 594 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 594 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 595 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 1 (Engine Compartment)................................................ 595 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 595 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 596 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe 1 and 2 (Engine Compartment)......................................... 596 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 596 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 597 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 2 and High-pressure Pipe 3............................................ 597 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 597 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 598 Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank............................................................................. 599 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 599 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 599 Removal and Installation of Condenser............................................................................... 600 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 600 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 601 Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor............................................................. 601 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 601 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 601 Removal and Installation of Evaporator.............................................................................. 601 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 601 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 602 Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve......................................................................... 602 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 602 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 602 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...................................................................................... 603 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector....................................................... 603 Dye Injection....................................................................................................... 603 Electrical Leak Detector............................................................................................ 604 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR.......................................................................... 604 CHECKING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 605 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 607 Compressor.......................................................................................................... 607 Lubricant........................................................................................................... 607 Refrigerant......................................................................................................... 607 Engine Idling Speed................................................................................................. 607 Belt Tension........................................................................................................ 607 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 av.............................................................................................................................. 608 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 608 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 611 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 611 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 612 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 612 AUDIO................................................................................................................... 613 System Description.................................................................................................. 613 AUDIO SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 613 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM................................................................................... 614 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 614 Schematic — AUDIO — / With Navigation System........................................................................ 615 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / With Navigation System................................................................... 616 Schematic — AUDIO — Without Navigation System....................................................................... 626 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / Without Navigation System................................................................ 627 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 636 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.................................................................. 638 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 640 Terminals and Reference Value for Woofer............................................................................ 641 Terminals and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner............................................................. 641 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 642 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 642 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 642 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 642 Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................................... 643 Power Supply Circuit Inspection..................................................................................... 644 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 645 A/C and AV Switch Inspection........................................................................................ 647 BOSE Speaker Amp. Inspection........................................................................................ 647 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 648 Locking CD Auto-Changer Mechanism................................................................................... 649 DAMPER LOCK PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 649 Removal and Installation of Audio Unit.............................................................................. 650 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 650 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 650 Disassembly and Assembly for Audio Unit............................................................................. 650 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 650 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 650 Removal and Installation for A/C and AV Switch...................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Front Door Speaker..................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Rear Door Speaker...................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Instrument Speaker..................................................................... 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for Tweeter................................................................................ 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for Woofer (BOSE System)................................................................... 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp....................................................................... 653 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 653 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 653 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Tuner................................................................... 654 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 654 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 654 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Antenna................................................................. 654 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 654 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 654 ANTENNA................................................................................................................. 655 System Description.................................................................................................. 655 Wiring Diagram — M/ANT —............................................................................................ 656 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 657 Antenna Amp. Inspection............................................................................................. 657 Location of Antenna................................................................................................. 658 RADIO ANTENNA AND GPS ANTENNA................................................................................... 658 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA......................................................................................... 658 Window Antenna Repair............................................................................................... 659 CHECK ELEMENT................................................................................................... 659 Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna............................................................................ 660 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 660 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 660 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Antenna................................................................. 660 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM............................................................................................... 661 System Description.................................................................................................. 661 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM....................................................................................... 661 Component Description............................................................................................... 662 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................ 662 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 662 A/C AND AV SWITCH............................................................................................... 662 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 662 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 662 Schematic — INF/D —................................................................................................. 663 Wiring Diagram — INF/D —............................................................................................ 664 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 670 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 671 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 676 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 679 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 681 Special Note for Trouble Diagnosis.................................................................................. 682 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 682 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 682 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 682 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 683 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 683 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 684 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 684 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 685 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 686 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 686 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 687 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 687 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 688 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR............................................................................................ 688 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 688 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 689 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 689 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 689 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 689 CAN Communication Check............................................................................................. 690 Unable to Operate System with A/C and AV Switch..................................................................... 691 All Images Are Not Displayed........................................................................................ 693 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image................................................................................... 695 RGB Image Is Rolling................................................................................................ 697 Values for All Items in The TRIP Screen Do Not Change............................................................... 698 Values for Items, “Driving Distance” and “Average Speed” Do Not Change.............................................. 698 Values for All Items in The FUEL ECONOMY Screen Do Not Change....................................................... 698 Example of Symptoms Possible No Malfunction......................................................................... 699 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 699 Removal and Installation of Display................................................................................. 699 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 699 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 699 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 699 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 699 NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 700 System Description.................................................................................................. 700 NAVIGATION SYSTEM............................................................................................... 701 Location Detection Principle................................................................................ 701 Map-Matching................................................................................................ 702 GPS (GlobalPositioningSystem)............................................................................. 703 Component Description............................................................................................... 704 NAVI CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................... 704 DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................... 704 DVD-ROM..................................................................................................... 704 Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)................................................................................. 704 GPS ANTENNA..................................................................................................... 704 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................ 704 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 705 A/C AND AV SWITCH............................................................................................... 705 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 705 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 705 Schematic — NAVI —.................................................................................................. 706 Wiring Diagram — NAVI —............................................................................................. 707 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 714 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 715 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit................................................................. 720 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 722 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 726 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 728 Special Note for Trouble Diagnosis.................................................................................. 729 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 729 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 729 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 729 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 730 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 730 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 731 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 731 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 732 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI).......................................................................................... 733 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 733 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 735 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 735 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 736 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 736 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 737 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 737 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 738 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 738 Display Diagnosis........................................................................................... 738 Vehicle Signals............................................................................................. 739 Navigation.................................................................................................. 739 Error History............................................................................................... 740 Diagnosis by Error History.................................................................................. 741 Delete Unit Connection Log.................................................................................. 742 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR............................................................................................ 743 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 743 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 744 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 744 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 744 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 744 CAN Communication Check............................................................................................. 745 Unable to Operate System with A/C and AV Switch..................................................................... 746 All Images Are Not Displayed........................................................................................ 748 Status Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing Map Screen............................................ 750 Vehicle Mark Is Not Displayed Properly.............................................................................. 751 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image................................................................................... 752 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image (Only NAVI Screen)................................................................ 754 RGB Image Is Rolling................................................................................................ 756 Values for All Items in The TRIP Screen Do Not Change............................................................... 757 Values for Items, “Driving Distance” and “Average Speed” Do Not Change.............................................. 757 Values for All Items in The FUEL ECONOMY Screen Do Not Change....................................................... 757 Voice Guidance Is Not Heard......................................................................................... 758 Example of Symptoms Possible No Malfunction......................................................................... 759 BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 759 VEHICLE MARKS................................................................................................... 759 DVD-ROM......................................................................................................... 760 ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE........................................................................... 760 VOICE GUIDANCE.................................................................................................. 761 Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit....................................................................... 762 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 762 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 762 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna............................................................................. 762 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 762 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 762 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 763 Removal and Installation of Display Unit............................................................................ 763 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 763 INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................... 764 System Description.................................................................................................. 764 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 765 Wiring Diagram – MES –.............................................................................................. 766 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Player........................................................................ 768 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Display....................................................................... 769 DVD Player Does Not Work............................................................................................ 771 Screen Is Not Shown (While Sounds Come Out of an Audio Speaker, Did Not Do of a Head Phone)......................... 773 Screen Is not Shown (Sounds Come Out of Both an Audio Speaker and a Head Phone)..................................... 774 Head Phone Does Not Sound........................................................................................... 775 Remote Controller Does Not Work..................................................................................... 776 No CD·DVD Sound From All Speakers................................................................................... 777 Removal and Installation for DVD Player............................................................................. 779 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 779 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 779 Removal and Installation for DVD Display Unit....................................................................... 779 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 779 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 780 TELEPHONE............................................................................................................... 781 System Description.................................................................................................. 781 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM......................................................................................... 781 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 782 Schematic........................................................................................................... 783 Wiring Diagram — H/PHON —........................................................................................... 784 Terminals and Reference Value for TEL Adapter Unit.................................................................. 789 Self-Diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 790 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 791 Basic Inspection of Hands-Free Phone................................................................................ 793 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Does Not Operate........................................................................ 793 Voice Activated Control Function Does Not Operate................................................................... 795 TEL VOICE GUIDANCE IS HEARD WHEN PRESSING AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH........................................... 795 TEL VOICE GUIDANCE IS NOT HEARD WHEN PRESSING AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH....................................... 796 Removal and Installation of TEL Adapter Unit........................................................................ 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 Removal and Installation for TEL Antenna............................................................................ 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 Removal and Installation of Microphone.............................................................................. 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 bcs............................................................................................................................. 800 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 800 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 801 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 801 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................................................................................... 802 System Description.................................................................................................. 802 BCM FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 802 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION............................................................................. 802 Description................................................................................................. 802 Operation Description....................................................................................... 802 Operation Table Of BCM and Combination Switches............................................................. 803 Sample Operation: (When Lighting Switch 1ST Position Turned ON)............................................. 803 Operation Mode.............................................................................................. 804 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL....................................................................................... 804 BCM STATUS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 805 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY.............................................................................. 806 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 806 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND COMBINATION METER................................................................. 806 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 806 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM, COMBINATION METER AND IPDM E/R....................................................... 806 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................. 807 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 808 Schematic........................................................................................................... 809 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 811 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 811 ITEMS OF EACH PART.............................................................................................. 811 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 812 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 812 Display Item List........................................................................................... 812 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)...................................................... 812 Removal and Installation of BCM..................................................................................... 813 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 813 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 813 bl.............................................................................................................................. 814 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 814 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 818 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 818 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 818 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 818 Precautions for Work................................................................................................ 818 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 819 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 819 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 819 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................... 820 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 820 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW.............................................................................................. 820 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE.............................................................................. 821 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................. 821 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE.................................................................... 821 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................ 821 CONFIRM THE REPAIR.............................................................................................. 822 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting........................................................................... 822 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................ 822 CENTER CONSOLE.................................................................................................. 822 DOORS........................................................................................................... 822 TRUNK........................................................................................................... 823 SUNROOF/HEADLINING.............................................................................................. 823 SEATS........................................................................................................... 823 UNDERHOOD....................................................................................................... 823 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................ 824 HOOD.................................................................................................................... 826 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 826 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT................................................................... 826 FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 826 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 826 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly........................................................................... 827 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 828 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 828 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control....................................................................... 828 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 828 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 829 Hood Lock Control Inspection........................................................................................ 829 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT................................................................................................... 831 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 831 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 831 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 832 FRONT FENDER............................................................................................................ 833 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 833 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 833 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 833 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 834 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 834 System Description.................................................................................................. 835 OUTLINE......................................................................................................... 836 Functions Available by Operating the Door Lock and Unlock Switches on Driver's Door and Passenger........... 836 Functions Available by Operating the Key Cylinder Switch on Driver's........................................ 836 Select Unlock Operation..................................................................................... 836 Key Reminder Door System.................................................................................... 836 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 837 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 837 Schematic/With Intelligent Key...................................................................................... 838 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/With Intelligent Key...................................................................... 839 Schematic/Without Intelligent Key................................................................................... 844 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Without Intelligent Key................................................................... 845 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 849 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit (With Intelligent Key System)................................ 849 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 850 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 850 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE...................................................................................... 850 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 850 Work Support................................................................................................ 850 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 850 Active Test................................................................................................. 851 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 851 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit........................................................................... 852 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 853 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 853 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 855 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 857 Check Door Lock and Unlock Switch................................................................................... 859 Check Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side).............................................................................. 861 Check Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side and Rear LH/RH)............................................................ 862 Check Fuel Lid Lock Actuator........................................................................................ 863 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Lock)......................................................................... 864 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Unlock)....................................................................... 865 Check Select Unlock Relay Circuit................................................................................... 866 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM............................................................................................. 867 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 867 System Description.................................................................................................. 868 INPUTS.......................................................................................................... 868 OPERATED PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 869 Power Door Lock Operation................................................................................... 869 Hazard and Horn Reminder.................................................................................... 869 Auto Door Lock Operation.................................................................................... 869 Panic Alarm Operation....................................................................................... 870 Keyless Power Window Down (Open) Operation.................................................................. 870 Room Lamp and Ignition Key Ring Illumination Operation...................................................... 870 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 870 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 870 Schematic........................................................................................................... 871 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES —........................................................................................... 872 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 875 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 876 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 877 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 877 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 877 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 877 Active Test................................................................................................. 877 Work Support................................................................................................ 878 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 879 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 880 Check Key Fob Battery and Function.................................................................................. 882 Check ACC Switch.................................................................................................... 883 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 884 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 884 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 886 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 888 Check Remote Keyless Entry Receiver................................................................................. 889 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 892 Check Hazard Warning Lamp Function.................................................................................. 893 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 893 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 893 Check Map Lamp and Ignition Keyhole Illumination Function........................................................... 893 ID Code Entry Procedure............................................................................................. 894 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................... 894 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................................ 896 Removal and Installation of Remote keyless Entry receiver........................................................... 897 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 897 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 897 Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................................................................... 898 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 899 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 899 System Description.................................................................................................. 901 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 901 Operation Description....................................................................................... 901 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 902 Auto Door Lock Function..................................................................................... 902 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 902 Intelligent Key Lock-in Prevention Function................................................................. 902 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. 902 Door Lock Function.......................................................................................... 902 Map Lamp And Keyhole Illumination Function.................................................................. 903 Panic Alarm Function........................................................................................ 903 Remote Control Power Window Down (Open) Operation........................................................... 903 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 903 ENGINE STARTUP FUNCTION......................................................................................... 903 Operation Description....................................................................................... 903 Operation Range............................................................................................. 903 Active Check Function....................................................................................... 904 WARNING AND ALARM FUNCTION...................................................................................... 904 Operation Description....................................................................................... 904 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 904 Warning Procedure........................................................................................... 905 CHANGE SETTINGS FUNCTION........................................................................................ 907 Changing Settings With the Intelligent Key.................................................................. 907 Changing Settings Using CONSULT-II.......................................................................... 907 Changing Settings Using Display Unit........................................................................ 907 INTELLIGENT KEY REGISTRATION.................................................................................... 907 STEERING LOCK UNIT REGISTRATION................................................................................. 907 Steering Lock Unit ID Registration.......................................................................... 907 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 908 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 908 Schematic........................................................................................................... 909 Wiring Diagram — I/KEY —............................................................................................ 911 Terminals and Reference Value for INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 924 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock unit................................................................ 926 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 926 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 927 Diagnosis Procedure................................................................................................. 928 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 928 CONSULT-II Functions (INTELLIGENT KEY).............................................................................. 929 CONSULT-II Start Procedure.......................................................................................... 929 CONSULT-II Application Items........................................................................................ 929 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 929 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS......................................................................................... 929 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 930 MAIN SIGNALS Display Item................................................................................... 930 ACTIVE TEST..................................................................................................... 930 List of Operation Related Parts..................................................................................... 931 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart..................................................................................... 932 ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE INTELLIGENT KEY ARE NOT OPERATING.......................................................... 932 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTION MALFUNCTION....................................................................... 932 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.................................................................................. 933 ENGINE START FUNCTION MALFUNCTION............................................................................... 934 Intelligent Key Operation Inspection........................................................................ 934 Mechanical Key Operation Inspection......................................................................... 934 WARNING CHIME FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.............................................................................. 934 Check CAN Communication System Inspection........................................................................... 937 Check Intelligent Key Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit.......................................................... 937 Check Key Switch (Intelligent Key Unit Input)....................................................................... 938 Check Key Switch (BCM Input)........................................................................................ 939 Check Ignition Knob Switch.......................................................................................... 940 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 942 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 942 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 943 Check Unlock Sensor................................................................................................. 944 Check Door Request Switch........................................................................................... 946 Check Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer................................................................................ 947 Check Outside Key Antenna........................................................................................... 948 Check Inside Key Antenna............................................................................................ 951 Check Steering Lock Unit............................................................................................ 952 Check Stop Lamp Switch.............................................................................................. 954 Check Park Position Switch.......................................................................................... 955 Check Select Unlock Relay........................................................................................... 957 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 958 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 958 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 958 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 958 Removal and Installation of Intelligent Key Unit.................................................................... 959 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 959 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 959 Intelligent Key Battery Replacement................................................................................. 960 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY INSPECTION.............................................................................. 960 DOOR.................................................................................................................... 961 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 961 FRONT DOOR...................................................................................................... 961 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 961 REAR DOOR....................................................................................................... 961 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 961 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 962 Removal and Installation of Front Door.............................................................................. 962 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 962 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 963 Removal and Installation of Rear Door............................................................................... 963 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 963 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 964 Removal and Installation of Door Weatherstrip....................................................................... 964 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 964 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 964 FRONT DOOR LOCK......................................................................................................... 965 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 965 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 965 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 967 REAR DOOR LOCK.......................................................................................................... 968 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 968 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 968 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 970 BACK DOOR............................................................................................................... 971 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 971 VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................... 971 Back Door Assembly.................................................................................................. 971 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 971 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 972 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 972 Removal and Installation of Back Door Striker....................................................................... 972 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 972 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 972 Removal and Installation of Back Door Stay.......................................................................... 973 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 973 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 973 Removal and Installation of Dave Tail Male & Female................................................................. 973 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 973 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 974 Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip.................................................................. 974 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 974 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 974 BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY................................................................................................. 975 Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock & Closure Assembly....................................................... 975 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 975 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 975 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 975 Removal and Installation of Back Door Opener Switch................................................................. 975 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 975 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 976 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 976 BACK DOOR LOCK & CLOSURE ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 976 BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE SYSTEM........................................................................................... 977 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 977 System Description.................................................................................................. 977 CLOSE OPERATION................................................................................................. 977 NON-OPERATION CONDITION......................................................................................... 977 OPEN OPERATION.................................................................................................. 978 Wiring Diagram — B/CLOS —........................................................................................... 979 Terminals and Reference Value for Back Door Closure Control Unit.................................................... 981 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 982 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 982 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 982 Check Back Door Closure Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit................................................ 983 Check Half-Latch Switch............................................................................................. 983 Check Close Switch.................................................................................................. 985 Check Open Switch................................................................................................... 986 Check Back Door Opener Switch (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 987 Check Back Door Opener Switch (Without Intelligent Key)............................................................. 989 Check Unlock Sensor (Without Intelligent Key)....................................................................... 991 Check Closure Motor................................................................................................. 992 Removal and Installation of Back Door Closer Control Unit........................................................... 992 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM................................................................................. 993 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 993 System Description.................................................................................................. 995 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 995 Operation Flow.............................................................................................. 995 Setting the Vehicle Security System......................................................................... 995 Canceling the Set Vehicle Security System................................................................... 996 Canceling the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System................................................ 996 Activating the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System............................................... 996 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................................... 996 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM........................................................................ 996 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION......................................................................... 997 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION............................................................................ 997 PANIC ALARM OPERATION........................................................................................... 997 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 997 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 997 Schematic........................................................................................................... 998 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —........................................................................................... 999 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1004 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1005 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1005 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................1005 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM.....................................................................................1005 Work Support................................................................................................1005 Data Monitor................................................................................................1006 Active Test.................................................................................................1006 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1007 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1007 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1008 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1009 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1010 1 – 1 DOOR SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1010 1 – 2 HOOD SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1012 1 – 3 BACK DOOR SWITCH CHECK....................................................................................1014 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1016 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK...................................................................................1016 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1017 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK............................................................................1017 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1017 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK...............................................................................1017 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1017 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK...........................................................................1017 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1017 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK...............................................................................1017 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).........................................................................1018 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1018 System Description..................................................................................................1019 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1019 SECURITY INDICATOR..............................................................................................1019 Condition of Security Indicator.............................................................................1019 System Composition..................................................................................................1020 ECM Re-Communicating Function.......................................................................................1020 Wiring Diagram – NATS –.............................................................................................1021 MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM..............................................................................1021 MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM...........................................................................1023 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock Unit/with Intelligent Key System....................................1024 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit/with Intelligent Key System..................................1024 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1025 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................1026 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................1026 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION........................................................................1027 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.............................................................................1027 NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART..........................................................................1028 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1029 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1029 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1030 Security Indicator Inspection.......................................................................................1030 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1031 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1032 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1033 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1034 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1035 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1037 Removal and Installation NATS Antenna Amp...........................................................................1038 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1038 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1038 INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER.........................................................................................1039 Wiring Diagram —TRNSCV—.............................................................................................1039 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................................................................1040 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................1040 SYMPTOM: Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver.............................................................1040 BODY REPAIR.............................................................................................................1042 Body Exterior Paint Color...........................................................................................1042 Body Component Parts................................................................................................1043 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS.......................................................................................1043 BODY COMPONENT PARTS............................................................................................1045 Corrosion Protection................................................................................................1047 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1047 Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel).........................................................1047 Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer...........................................1047 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX..............................................................................................1048 UNDERCOATING....................................................................................................1049 Precautions in Undercoating.................................................................................1049 STONE GUARD COAT................................................................................................1050 Body Sealing........................................................................................................1051 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1051 Body Construction...................................................................................................1054 BODY CONSTRUCTION...............................................................................................1054 Body Alignment......................................................................................................1055 BODY CENTER MARKS...............................................................................................1055 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS......................................................................................1056 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1057 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................1058 Measurement.................................................................................................1058 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1059 UNDERBODY.......................................................................................................1060 Measurement.................................................................................................1060 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1061 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................1062 Measurement.................................................................................................1062 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1063 REAR BODY.......................................................................................................1064 Measurement.................................................................................................1064 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1065 Handling Precautions For Plastics...................................................................................1066 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS...............................................................................1066 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS......................................................................................1067 Precautions In Repairing High Strength Steel........................................................................1069 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES...............................................................1069 Read the Following Precautions When Repairing HSS:..........................................................1070 Replacement Operations..............................................................................................1072 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1072 HOODLEDGE.......................................................................................................1075 FRONT SIDE MEMBER...............................................................................................1076 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT).........................................................................1078 FRONT PILLAR....................................................................................................1079 CENTER PILLAR...................................................................................................1081 OUTER SILL......................................................................................................1083 REAR FENDER.....................................................................................................1085 REAR PANEL......................................................................................................1087 REAR END CROSSMEMBER............................................................................................1089 REAR FLOOR REAR.................................................................................................1091 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION......................................................................................1094 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 br..............................................................................................................................1096 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1096 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................1098 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1098 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................1098 Precautions for Brake System........................................................................................1098 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................1099 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................1099 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................1100 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1100 BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................1101 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................1101 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................1101 Components..........................................................................................................1102 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1102 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1102 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1103 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1103 BRAKE FLUID.............................................................................................................1104 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1104 LEVEL CHECK.....................................................................................................1104 Drain and Refill....................................................................................................1104 Bleeding Brake System...............................................................................................1105 BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE.....................................................................................................1106 Hydraulic Circuit...................................................................................................1106 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Tube and Brake Hose.........................................................1106 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1106 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1106 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose........................................................1107 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1107 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1107 Inspection After Installation.......................................................................................1107 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...................................................................................................1108 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1108 LEAK INSPECTION.................................................................................................1108 Components..........................................................................................................1108 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1108 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1108 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1109 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1109 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1109 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1109 BRAKE BOOSTER...........................................................................................................1110 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................1110 OPERATING CHECK.................................................................................................1110 AIRTIGHT CHECK..................................................................................................1110 Components..........................................................................................................1110 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1111 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1111 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1111 Output Rod Length Inspection................................................................................1111 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1111 VACUUM LINES............................................................................................................1112 Components..........................................................................................................1112 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1112 Inspection..........................................................................................................1113 VISUAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................1113 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION..........................................................................................1113 Airtightness Inspection.....................................................................................1113 FRONT DISC BRAKE........................................................................................................1114 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1114 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1114 Components..........................................................................................................1114 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1115 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1115 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1115 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1115 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1115 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1116 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1116 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1116 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................1117 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1117 Torque Member...............................................................................................1117 Piston......................................................................................................1117 Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Bolt, and Sliding Pin Boot.........................................................1117 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1117 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1119 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1119 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1119 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1119 Brake Burnishing Procedure..........................................................................................1119 REAR DISC BRAKE.........................................................................................................1120 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1120 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1120 Components..........................................................................................................1120 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1121 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1121 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1122 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1122 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................1123 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1123 Torque Member...............................................................................................1123 Piston......................................................................................................1123 Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots.....................................................................1123 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1123 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1125 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1125 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1125 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1125 Brake Burnishing Procedure..........................................................................................1125 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................1126 General Specifications..............................................................................................1126 Brake Pedal.........................................................................................................1126 Brake Booster.......................................................................................................1126 Check Valve.........................................................................................................1126 Front Disc Brake....................................................................................................1126 Rear Disc Brake.....................................................................................................1126 brc.............................................................................................................................1128 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1128 VDC/TCS/ABS.............................................................................................................1130 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1130 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1130 Precautions for Brake System....................................................................................1130 Precautions for Brake Control...................................................................................1130 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1132 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1132 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1132 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE..................................................................................................1133 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position............................................................1133 Calibration of Decel G Sensor (AWD Models)......................................................................1134 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1135 System Diagram..................................................................................................1135 Functions.......................................................................................................1135 VDC.........................................................................................................1135 TCS.........................................................................................................1135 ABS.........................................................................................................1136 EBD.........................................................................................................1136 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1136 VDC / TCS SYSTEM............................................................................................1136 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1136 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1137 CAN Communication...............................................................................................1137 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1137 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1138 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1138 VDC/TCS SYSTEM..............................................................................................1138 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1138 How to Proceed with Diagnosis...................................................................................1138 BASIC CONCEPT...............................................................................................1138 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART.........................................................................................1139 ASKING COMPLAINTS...........................................................................................1140 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET..................................................................................1140 Component Installation Location.................................................................................1141 Schematic.......................................................................................................1142 Wiring Diagram — VDC —..........................................................................................1143 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard.......................................................................1149 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II.............................................................................1149 CONSULT-II Functions (ABS)......................................................................................1151 CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION....................................................................................1151 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE................................................................................1151 Self-Diagnosis..................................................................................................1152 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1152 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1152 ERASE MEMORY................................................................................................1152 DISPLAY ITEM LIST...........................................................................................1153 Data Monitor....................................................................................................1156 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1156 DISPLAY ITEM LIST...........................................................................................1156 Active Test.....................................................................................................1158 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1158 TEST ITEM...................................................................................................1159 Solenoid Valve..........................................................................................1159 ABS Motor...............................................................................................1159 For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis.................................................................................1160 PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................1160 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1161 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION........................................................1161 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION......................................................1161 ABS WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING LAMP INSPECTION.............1161 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM........................................................................................1163 Wheel Sensor Circuit............................................................................................1163 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1163 Engine System...................................................................................................1165 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1165 VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit................................................................................1165 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1165 Pressure Sensor Circuit.........................................................................................1166 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1166 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit...................................................................................1168 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1168 Yaw Rate/Side G Sensor (2WD Models), Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor (AWD Models) Circuit..........................1169 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1169 Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve Circuit......................................................................1171 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1171 Actuator Motor Circuit..........................................................................................1172 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1172 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground Circuit...................................1173 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1173 Stop Lamp Switch Circuit........................................................................................1175 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1175 Brake Fluid Level Switch Circuit................................................................................1177 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1177 When “ST ANG SEN SIGNAL” Appears on Self-diagnosis Results Display..............................................1178 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1178 When “DECEL G SEN SET” Appears on Self-diagnostic Results Display (AWD Models)..................................1178 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1178 CAN Communication Circuit.......................................................................................1179 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1179 Component Inspection............................................................................................1179 VDC OFF SWITCH..............................................................................................1179 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS......................................................................................1180 Excessive ABS Function Operation Frequency......................................................................1180 Unexpected Pedal Reaction.......................................................................................1180 The Braking Distance is Long....................................................................................1181 The ABS Function Does Not Operate...............................................................................1181 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Sound Occurs...................................................................1181 Vehicle Jerks During VDC/TCS/ABS Control........................................................................1182 WHEEL SENSORS.......................................................................................................1184 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1184 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1184 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1184 SENSOR ROTOR........................................................................................................1186 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1186 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1186 Front...................................................................................................1186 Rear....................................................................................................1186 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1186 Front...................................................................................................1186 Rear....................................................................................................1186 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)...............................................................................1187 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1187 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1187 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1188 G SENSOR............................................................................................................1189 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1189 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1189 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1189 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR...............................................................................................1190 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1190 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1190 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1190 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 80 co..............................................................................................................................1192 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1192 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1194 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1194 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1194 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................1194 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................1194 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................1194 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1196 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1196 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1197 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1198 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1198 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1200 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1200 System Chart....................................................................................................1201 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1202 Inspection......................................................................................................1202 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1202 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1202 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1202 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1202 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1203 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1204 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1205 Components......................................................................................................1205 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1205 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1205 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1206 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1206 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1206 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1207 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1208 Components......................................................................................................1208 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1208 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1208 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1208 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1209 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1211 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1212 Components......................................................................................................1212 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1212 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1212 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1212 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1212 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1212 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1212 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1212 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1212 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1212 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1213 Components......................................................................................................1213 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1213 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1213 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1215 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1215 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1217 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY.................................................................................1218 Components......................................................................................................1218 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1218 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1218 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1219 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1219 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1219 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING.......................................................................................1220 Components......................................................................................................1220 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1220 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1220 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1221 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1221 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1222 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1222 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1222 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1222 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1222 VK45DE..................................................................................................................1223 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1223 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1223 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1224 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1224 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1224 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1225 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1225 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1227 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1227 System Chart....................................................................................................1228 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1229 Inspection......................................................................................................1229 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1229 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1229 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1229 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1229 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1230 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1231 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1232 Components......................................................................................................1232 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1232 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1232 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1234 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1234 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1234 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1235 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1236 Components......................................................................................................1236 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1236 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1236 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1236 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1237 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1239 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1240 Components (Crankshaft Driven type).............................................................................1240 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1240 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1240 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1240 Fan Coupling............................................................................................1240 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1240 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1240 Components (Motor Driven Type)..................................................................................1241 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1241 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1241 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1241 Disassembly and Assembly (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1241 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1241 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1241 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1241 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1241 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1242 Components......................................................................................................1242 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1242 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1242 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1243 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1243 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1243 THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................1244 Components......................................................................................................1244 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1245 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1245 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1245 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1245 Thermostat and Water Control Valve......................................................................1246 Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe.......................................................................1246 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1246 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1247 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1247 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1247 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1247 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1247 WATER CONTROL VALVE.........................................................................................1247 di..............................................................................................................................1248 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1248 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................1251 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1251 COMBINATION METERS......................................................................................................1252 System Description..................................................................................................1252 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................1252 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.......................................................................................1252 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1252 SPEEDOMETER.....................................................................................................1253 TACHOMETER......................................................................................................1253 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE.........................................................................................1253 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1254 ODO/TRIP METER..................................................................................................1254 How to Change The Display For Odo/trip Meter................................................................1254 COMBINATION METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL..........................................................................1255 Daytime Mode................................................................................................1255 Nighttime Mode..............................................................................................1255 FAIL-SAFE.......................................................................................................1255 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1256 Arrangement of Combination Meter....................................................................................1257 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................1258 Wiring Diagram — METER —............................................................................................1259 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1261 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1262 Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter............................................................................1262 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.........................................................................................1262 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1262 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1263 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1263 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1263 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................1264 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................1264 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1265 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection.....................................................................................1266 Engine Speed Signal Inspection......................................................................................1267 Engine Coolant Temperature Signal Inspection........................................................................1268 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection.................................................................................1268 Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies......................................................1270 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position...........................................................................1270 Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch Inspection...........................................................1271 Electrical Components Inspection....................................................................................1271 ODO/TRIP METER AND ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH..................................................................1271 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT..........................................................................................1271 Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump (Main).................................................................1271 Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Pump (Main) Harness..............................................................1272 Fuel Level Sensor Unit (Sub)................................................................................1272 Removal and Installation of Combination Meter.......................................................................1272 Disassembly and Assembly of Combination Meter.......................................................................1272 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1273 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1274 Removal and Installation of Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch..........................................1274 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1274 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1274 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP...............................................................................................1275 System Description..................................................................................................1275 COMBINATION METER CONTROL FUNCTION..............................................................................1275 Input/output signals between unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter...............................1275 A/C AUTO AMP. FUNCTION..........................................................................................1276 OTHER FUNCTIONS.................................................................................................1276 Drive Computer Function.....................................................................................1276 Signal Buffer Function......................................................................................1276 Schematic...........................................................................................................1277 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1278 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1278 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1278 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1278 Display Item List...........................................................................................1278 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1279 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1279 Display Item List...........................................................................................1279 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1280 DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit...............................................................................1281 DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit.............................................................................1281 DTC [B2205] Vehicle Speed Circuit...................................................................................1284 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................1284 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1284 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1284 WARNING LAMPS...........................................................................................................1285 System Description..................................................................................................1285 OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP.......................................................................................1285 Schematic...........................................................................................................1286 Wiring Diagram — WARN —.............................................................................................1287 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)............................................................1295 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)................................................1296 Component Inspection................................................................................................1298 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.............................................................................................1298 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................................................................1299 System Description..................................................................................................1299 MANUAL MODE.....................................................................................................1299 NOT MANUAL MODE.................................................................................................1299 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —...........................................................................................1300 A/T Indicator Is Malfunction........................................................................................1302 WARNING CHIME...........................................................................................................1303 System Description..................................................................................................1303 POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT........................................................................................1303 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY)............................................................1304 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITH INTELLIGENT KEY)...............................................................1304 When Mechanical Key Is Used.................................................................................1304 When Intelligent Key Is Carried With The Driver.............................................................1304 LIGHT WARNING CHIME.............................................................................................1305 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................1305 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1306 Schematic...........................................................................................................1307 Wiring Diagram — CHIME —............................................................................................1308 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1311 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1312 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1313 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1313 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1313 DIAGNOSIS ITEMS DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................1313 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1313 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1313 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1313 Display Item List...........................................................................................1314 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1314 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1314 Display Item List...........................................................................................1314 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1314 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1314 Display Item List...........................................................................................1314 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1314 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1314 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................1315 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................1315 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1315 Combination Meter Buzzer Circuit Inspection.........................................................................1316 Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Signal Inspection...................................................................1318 Key Switch Signal Inspection (Without Intelligent Key)..............................................................1319 Key Switch and Ignition Knob Switch Signal Inspection (With Intelligent Key, When Mechanical Key ...................1320 Lighting Switch Signal Inspection...................................................................................1321 Seat Belt Buckle Switch (Driver Side) Signal Inspection.............................................................1322 Component Inspection................................................................................................1323 FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE).................................................................................1323 KEY SWITCH......................................................................................................1323 KEY SWITCH AND IGNITION KNOB SWITCH.............................................................................1323 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)...........................................................................1323 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM...........................................................................................1324 Precautions for Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system.................................................................1324 System Description..................................................................................................1324 LDW SYSTEM OPERATION............................................................................................1324 Warning Function............................................................................................1325 System Diagram..............................................................................................1326 Components Description......................................................................................1326 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1326 Action Test.........................................................................................................1327 LDW SYSTEM RUNNING TEST.........................................................................................1327 Function Check..............................................................................................1327 Camera Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................1327 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................1327 PREPARATION.....................................................................................................1327 TARGET SETTING..................................................................................................1327 Preparation Aiming Adjustment Jig...........................................................................1327 Target......................................................................................................1328 Target Setting..............................................................................................1329 VEHICLE HEIGHT CHECK............................................................................................1330 AIMING ADJUSTMENT...............................................................................................1330 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1330 Check After The Adjustment..................................................................................1334 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1334 Schematic...........................................................................................................1335 Wiring Diagram — LDW —..............................................................................................1336 Terminals and Reference Value for LDW Camera Unit...................................................................1339 CONSULT-II Function (LDW)...........................................................................................1339 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1339 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1339 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1339 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1339 Display Item................................................................................................1339 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1339 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1339 Display Item................................................................................................1340 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1340 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1340 Monitored Item..............................................................................................1340 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1341 Active Test Item............................................................................................1341 BUZZER DRIVE................................................................................................1341 SYSTEM ON LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1341 INDICATOR LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1342 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1342 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1342 SYMPTOM CHART...................................................................................................1342 Preliminary Inspection..............................................................................................1342 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1343 DTC [C1B00] CAMERA UNIT MALF........................................................................................1344 DTC [C1B01] CAM AIMING INCMP........................................................................................1344 DTC [C1B02] VHCL SPD DATA MALF......................................................................................1344 DTC [C1B03] ABNRML TEMP DETECT......................................................................................1345 DTC [U1000] CAN COMM CIRCUIT........................................................................................1345 DTC [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (CAN)......................................................................................1345 LDW Chime Circuit Inspection........................................................................................1345 LDW Switch Circuit Inspection.......................................................................................1346 LDW Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection...............................................................................1349 Turn Signal Input Inspection........................................................................................1350 Electrical Component Inspection.....................................................................................1350 LDW SWITCH......................................................................................................1350 Removal and Installation for LDW Camera Unit........................................................................1351 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1351 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1351 Removal and Installation for LDW Chime..............................................................................1351 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1351 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1351 Removal and Installation for LDW Switch.............................................................................1351 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................1352 System Description..................................................................................................1352 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1352 COMPASS.................................................................................................................1353 Precautions for Compass.............................................................................................1353 System Description..................................................................................................1353 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................1354 Zone Variation Setting Procedure....................................................................................1355 Calibration Procedure...............................................................................................1355 Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —...........................................................................................1356 Removal and Installation of Compass.................................................................................1357 CLOCK...................................................................................................................1358 Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —............................................................................................1358 Removal and Installation of Clock...................................................................................1359 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1359 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1359 REAR VIEW MONITOR.......................................................................................................1360 System Description..................................................................................................1360 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................1360 AV COMMUNICATION LINE...........................................................................................1360 REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION......................................................................................1360 Side Distance Guideline.....................................................................................1361 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1361 Schematic...........................................................................................................1362 Wiring Diagram — R/VIEW —...........................................................................................1363 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit.....................................................1366 CONSULT-II Function (REARVIEW CAMERA)...............................................................................1367 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1367 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1367 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1367 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1367 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1367 Display Item List...........................................................................................1367 Side Distance Guideline Correction..................................................................................1368 SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................1368 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1370 Rear View Is Not Displayed With The A/T Selector Lever In R-Position................................................1371 The Rear View Image Is Distorted....................................................................................1375 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera Control Unit...........................................................1376 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1376 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1376 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera........................................................................1377 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1377 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1377 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 ec..............................................................................................................................1378 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1378 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1392 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................1392 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................1392 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................1396 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1400 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1400 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...............................................................1400 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................1400 Precaution......................................................................................................1401 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1404 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1404 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1405 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................1406 System Diagram..................................................................................................1406 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................1407 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1407 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1407 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................1407 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................1408 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................1408 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................1408 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................1409 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................1409 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................1409 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................1409 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................1409 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1409 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1409 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................1410 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1410 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1410 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................1411 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................1411 System Description..............................................................................................1411 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................1412 System Description..............................................................................................1412 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1412 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................1412 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................1412 ACCELERATOR OPERATION.......................................................................................1412 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................1412 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................1412 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................1413 Component Description...........................................................................................1413 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1413 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1413 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1413 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1413 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................1413 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1414 System Description..............................................................................................1414 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................1415 Description.....................................................................................................1415 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1415 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................1416 Component Inspection............................................................................................1418 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1418 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)..................................................1418 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1418 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1418 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1418 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1418 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................1419 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1419 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1419 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1419 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................1419 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1420 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................1420 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................1422 System Description..............................................................................................1422 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1423 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................1423 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................1424 Component Inspection............................................................................................1425 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................1425 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1425 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1426 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................1427 Description.....................................................................................................1427 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1427 Component Inspection............................................................................................1427 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................1427 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................1428 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................1429 Description.....................................................................................................1429 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................1430 Introduction....................................................................................................1430 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................1430 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................1431 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................1431 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................1435 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................1435 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................1436 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................1436 SRT Item................................................................................................1436 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................1437 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................1438 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................1439 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................1439 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................1440 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................1441 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................1443 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................1443 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................1444 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1444 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................1445 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................1445 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................1445 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)............................................1445 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................1446 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................1446 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................1446 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................1447 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................1447 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................1448 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................1448 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................1448 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........1449 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........1450 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1450 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................1450 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................1451 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................1452 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................1452 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1452 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1453 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1453 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................1458 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................1458 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1458 With GST................................................................................................1458 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................1458 Method A................................................................................................1458 Method B................................................................................................1458 Procedure After Replacing ECM...................................................................................1459 VIN Registration................................................................................................1459 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1459 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1459 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1459 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................1460 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1460 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1460 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................1460 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1460 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1460 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................1460 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1460 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1460 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1461 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1461 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1461 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................1462 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................1462 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................1462 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1462 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1463 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................1463 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1464 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................1464 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................1464 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................1465 Overall Sequence........................................................................................1465 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................1466 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................1468 Description.............................................................................................1468 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................1469 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................1470 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................1472 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................1473 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................1473 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................1475 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................1477 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................1483 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................1484 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................1486 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................1486 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1486 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................1486 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................1495 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1495 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................1496 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1497 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................1497 Work Item...............................................................................................1497 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................1498 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................1498 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................1498 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................1499 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1499 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................1503 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1503 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................1503 Test Item...............................................................................................1503 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................1504 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................1504 SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................1504 DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................1504 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................1505 Description.............................................................................................1505 Operation...............................................................................................1505 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................1506 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1506 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1506 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1507 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................1509 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................1511 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................1512 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.............................................1512 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................1514 Description.....................................................................................................1514 Testing Condition...............................................................................................1514 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................1514 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1515 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................1515 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................1517 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................1524 Description.....................................................................................................1524 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1524 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................1525 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1525 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1526 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................1530 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................1532 Description.....................................................................................................1532 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1532 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1532 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1533 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1534 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................1535 Description.....................................................................................................1535 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1535 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1535 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1535 WITH GST....................................................................................................1535 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1536 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................1537 Description.....................................................................................................1537 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1537 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1537 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1538 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1538 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1538 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1538 WITH GST....................................................................................................1539 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1539 Component Inspection............................................................................................1540 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1540 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1540 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1540 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER..................................................................1541 Description.....................................................................................................1541 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1541 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1541 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1541 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1541 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1541 WITH GST....................................................................................................1542 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1543 BANK 1......................................................................................................1543 BANK 2......................................................................................................1545 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1546 Component Inspection............................................................................................1548 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER........................................................................1548 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1548 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1548 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................1549 Description.....................................................................................................1549 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1549 OPERATION...................................................................................................1549 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1549 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1549 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1550 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1550 WITH GST....................................................................................................1550 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1551 BANK 1......................................................................................................1551 BANK 2......................................................................................................1553 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1554 Component Inspection............................................................................................1556 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................1556 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1556 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1556 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................1557 Component Description...........................................................................................1557 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1557 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1557 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1557 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1557 WITH GST....................................................................................................1557 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1558 BANK 1......................................................................................................1558 BANK 2......................................................................................................1560 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1562 Component Inspection............................................................................................1563 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1563 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1563 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1563 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................1564 Component Description...........................................................................................1564 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1564 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1564 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1565 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1565 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1565 With GST................................................................................................1565 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1565 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1565 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1566 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1566 With GST................................................................................................1566 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1567 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1568 Component Inspection............................................................................................1571 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1571 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1571 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1571 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1572 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1572 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................1573 Component Description...........................................................................................1573 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1573 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1573 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1573 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1574 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................1574 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1574 With GST................................................................................................1574 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................1574 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1574 With GST................................................................................................1574 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1575 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1576 Component Inspection............................................................................................1579 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1579 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1579 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1579 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1580 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1580 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................1581 Component Description...........................................................................................1581 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1581 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1581 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1581 WITH GST....................................................................................................1582 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1583 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1584 Component Inspection............................................................................................1585 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1585 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1585 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1585 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................1586 Component Description...........................................................................................1586 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1586 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1586 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1587 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1587 WITH GST....................................................................................................1587 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1588 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1589 Component Inspection............................................................................................1590 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1590 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1590 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1590 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1591 Component Description...........................................................................................1591 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1591 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1591 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1591 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1592 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1592 WITH GST....................................................................................................1592 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1593 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1594 Component Inspection............................................................................................1597 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1597 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1597 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1597 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................1598 Component Description...........................................................................................1598 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1598 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1599 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1599 WITH GST....................................................................................................1599 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1599 Component Inspection............................................................................................1600 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1600 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1600 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1600 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................1601 Component Description...........................................................................................1601 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1601 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1601 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1601 WITH GST....................................................................................................1602 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1602 Component Inspection............................................................................................1603 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1603 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1603 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1603 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................1604 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1604 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1604 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1604 WITH GST....................................................................................................1604 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1604 Component Inspection............................................................................................1605 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1605 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1605 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1605 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1606 Component Description...........................................................................................1606 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1606 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1606 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1606 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1606 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1606 With GST................................................................................................1607 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1607 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1607 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1608 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1608 With GST................................................................................................1608 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1609 BANK 1......................................................................................................1609 BANK 2......................................................................................................1611 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1612 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1615 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1615 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1616 Component Description...........................................................................................1616 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1616 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1616 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1617 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1617 WITH GST....................................................................................................1617 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1618 BANK 1......................................................................................................1618 BANK 2......................................................................................................1620 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1621 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1624 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1624 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1625 Component Description...........................................................................................1625 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1625 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1625 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1626 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1626 WITH GST....................................................................................................1626 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1627 BANK 1......................................................................................................1627 BANK 2......................................................................................................1629 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1630 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1633 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1633 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1634 Component Description...........................................................................................1634 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1634 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1634 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1635 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1635 WITH GST....................................................................................................1635 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1637 BANK 1......................................................................................................1637 BANK 2......................................................................................................1639 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1640 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1645 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1645 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2..............................................................................................1646 Component Description...........................................................................................1646 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1646 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1646 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1647 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1647 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1647 WITH GST....................................................................................................1647 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1649 BANK 1......................................................................................................1649 BANK 2......................................................................................................1651 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1652 Component Inspection............................................................................................1654 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1654 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1654 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1655 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1656 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1656 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................1657 Component Description...........................................................................................1657 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1657 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1657 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1658 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1658 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1658 With GST................................................................................................1658 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1658 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1658 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1659 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1659 With GST................................................................................................1659 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1660 BANK 1......................................................................................................1660 BANK 2......................................................................................................1662 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1663 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1663 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1665 Component Inspection............................................................................................1667 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1667 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1667 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1668 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1669 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1669 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................1670 Component Description...........................................................................................1670 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1670 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1670 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1671 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1671 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1671 WITH GST....................................................................................................1671 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1673 BANK 1......................................................................................................1673 BANK 2......................................................................................................1675 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1676 Component Inspection............................................................................................1678 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1678 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1678 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1679 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1680 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1680 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1681 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1681 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1681 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1681 WITH GST....................................................................................................1682 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1683 BANK 1......................................................................................................1683 BANK 2......................................................................................................1685 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1687 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1693 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1693 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1693 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1693 WITH GST....................................................................................................1694 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1695 BANK 1......................................................................................................1695 BANK 2......................................................................................................1697 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1699 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................1704 Component Description...........................................................................................1704 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1704 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1704 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1704 WITH GST....................................................................................................1705 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1706 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1707 Component Inspection............................................................................................1709 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1709 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1709 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1709 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................1710 Component Description...........................................................................................1710 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1710 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1710 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1710 WITH GST....................................................................................................1710 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1711 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1712 Component Inspection............................................................................................1714 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1714 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1714 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1714 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1715 Component Description...........................................................................................1715 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1715 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1715 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1715 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1716 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1716 WITH GST....................................................................................................1716 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1717 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1718 Component Inspection............................................................................................1721 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1721 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1721 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1721 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................1722 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1722 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1723 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1723 WITH GST....................................................................................................1723 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1723 DTC P0327, P0328 KS.................................................................................................1732 Component Description...........................................................................................1732 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1732 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1732 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1732 WITH GST....................................................................................................1732 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1733 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1734 Component Inspection............................................................................................1735 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1735 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1736 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1736 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................1737 Component Description...........................................................................................1737 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1737 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1737 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1738 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1738 WITH GST....................................................................................................1738 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1739 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1740 Component Inspection............................................................................................1743 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1743 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1743 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1743 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).................................................................................1744 Component Description...........................................................................................1744 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1744 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1744 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1745 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1745 WITH GST....................................................................................................1745 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1746 BANK 1......................................................................................................1746 BANK 2......................................................................................................1748 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1749 Component Inspection............................................................................................1752 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1752 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1752 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1752 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................1753 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1753 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1753 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1753 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1754 WITH GST....................................................................................................1754 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1755 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1759 System Description..............................................................................................1759 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1759 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1759 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1760 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1760 WITH GST....................................................................................................1760 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1761 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1764 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1764 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1765 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1765 WITH GST....................................................................................................1766 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1766 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................1773 Description.....................................................................................................1773 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1773 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1773 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1773 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1774 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1774 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1774 WITH GST....................................................................................................1774 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1775 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1777 Component Inspection............................................................................................1780 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1780 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1780 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1780 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1780 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1780 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................1781 Description.....................................................................................................1781 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1781 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1781 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1781 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1782 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1782 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1782 WITH GST....................................................................................................1782 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1783 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1785 Component Inspection............................................................................................1786 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1786 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1786 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1786 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1787 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1787 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1788 Component Description...........................................................................................1788 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1788 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1788 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1789 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1789 WITH GST....................................................................................................1789 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1790 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1791 Component Inspection............................................................................................1793 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1793 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1793 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1794 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1795 Component Description...........................................................................................1795 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1795 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1795 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1796 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1796 WITH GST....................................................................................................1796 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1797 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1798 Component Inspection............................................................................................1799 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1799 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1799 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1800 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1801 Component Description...........................................................................................1801 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1801 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1801 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1802 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1802 WITH GST....................................................................................................1802 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1802 Component Inspection............................................................................................1803 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1803 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1804 Component Description...........................................................................................1804 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1804 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1804 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1805 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1805 WITH GST....................................................................................................1805 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1806 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1807 Component Inspection............................................................................................1809 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1809 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1810 Component Description...........................................................................................1810 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1810 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1810 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1811 With CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1811 With GST....................................................................................................1811 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1812 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1813 Component Inspection............................................................................................1817 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1817 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1818 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1818 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1819 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1819 WITH GST....................................................................................................1820 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1820 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1826 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1826 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1827 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1827 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1828 WITH GST....................................................................................................1828 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1829 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1836 Component Description...........................................................................................1836 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1836 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1836 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1836 WITH GST....................................................................................................1836 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1837 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1837 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1837 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1838 Component Description...........................................................................................1838 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1838 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1838 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1838 WITH GST....................................................................................................1839 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1839 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1839 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1839 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................1840 Component Description...........................................................................................1840 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1840 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1840 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1840 WITH GST....................................................................................................1840 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1841 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1841 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1841 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................1842 Description.....................................................................................................1842 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1842 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1842 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1842 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1842 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1843 WITH GST....................................................................................................1843 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1843 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1844 Description.....................................................................................................1844 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1844 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1844 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1844 WITH GST....................................................................................................1844 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1845 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1846 Description.....................................................................................................1846 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1846 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1846 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1846 WITH GST....................................................................................................1846 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1847 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................1848 Component Description...........................................................................................1848 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1848 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1848 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1848 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1848 WITH GST....................................................................................................1848 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1849 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1850 Component Inspection............................................................................................1852 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1852 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1852 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1852 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................1853 Component Description...........................................................................................1853 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1853 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1853 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1853 WITH GST....................................................................................................1853 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1854 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1855 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................1857 Component Description...........................................................................................1857 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1857 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1857 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1857 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1857 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1857 With GST................................................................................................1857 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1858 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1858 With GST................................................................................................1858 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1858 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1858 With GST................................................................................................1858 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1858 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................1860 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1860 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1860 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1860 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1860 WITH GST....................................................................................................1860 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1861 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1863 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................1865 Component Description...........................................................................................1865 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1865 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1865 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1865 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1865 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1866 WITH GST....................................................................................................1866 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1867 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1868 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................1870 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1870 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................1871 Description.....................................................................................................1871 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1871 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1871 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1871 WITH GST....................................................................................................1871 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1871 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................1872 Description.....................................................................................................1872 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1872 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1872 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1872 WITH GST....................................................................................................1872 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1872 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................1873 Description.....................................................................................................1873 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1873 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................1873 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................1873 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................1874 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1874 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................1874 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1874 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1874 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1875 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1875 WITH GST....................................................................................................1876 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1877 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1879 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................1879 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................1881 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................1884 Component Inspection............................................................................................1884 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2.................................................................................1884 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1886 Component Description...........................................................................................1886 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1886 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1886 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1886 WITH GST....................................................................................................1886 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1887 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1887 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1887 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1888 Component Description...........................................................................................1888 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1888 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1888 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1888 WITH GST....................................................................................................1888 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1889 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1889 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1889 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL........................................................................................1890 Description.....................................................................................................1890 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1890 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1890 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1890 WITH GST....................................................................................................1890 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1890 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................1892 Component Description...........................................................................................1892 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1892 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1892 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1893 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1893 WITH GST....................................................................................................1893 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1894 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1895 Component Inspection............................................................................................1898 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................1898 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................1899 Component Description...........................................................................................1899 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1899 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1899 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1900 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1900 WITH GST....................................................................................................1900 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1901 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1902 Component Inspection............................................................................................1904 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1904 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................1906 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1906 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1906 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1906 WITH GST....................................................................................................1906 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1906 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................1907 Component Description...........................................................................................1907 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1907 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1907 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1908 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1908 WITH GST....................................................................................................1908 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1909 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1910 Component Inspection............................................................................................1915 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................1915 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1915 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................1915 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................1916 Component Description...........................................................................................1916 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1916 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1916 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1917 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1917 WITH GST....................................................................................................1917 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1918 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1919 Component Inspection............................................................................................1923 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1923 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1923 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................1924 Component Description...........................................................................................1924 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1924 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1924 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1924 WITH GST....................................................................................................1924 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1925 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................1926 Component Description...........................................................................................1926 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1926 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1926 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1926 WITH GST....................................................................................................1926 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1927 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)............................................................1928 Description.....................................................................................................1928 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1928 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1928 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1928 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................1929 Description.....................................................................................................1929 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1929 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1929 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1929 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1929 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1929 WITH GST....................................................................................................1929 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1930 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1931 Component Inspection............................................................................................1933 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1933 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................1934 Component Description...........................................................................................1934 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1934 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1934 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1934 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1934 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100.....................................................................................1934 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1934 With GST................................................................................................1934 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103.....................................................................................1935 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1935 With GST................................................................................................1935 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1936 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1937 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................1940 Description.....................................................................................................1940 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1940 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1940 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1940 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1940 WITH GST....................................................................................................1940 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1941 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1942 Component Inspection............................................................................................1945 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1945 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1945 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1945 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................1946 Component Description...........................................................................................1946 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1946 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1946 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1946 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1946 WITH GST....................................................................................................1946 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1947 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1948 Component Inspection............................................................................................1949 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1949 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1950 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1950 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................1951 Component Description...........................................................................................1951 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1951 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1951 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1951 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................1951 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1951 With GST................................................................................................1951 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1952 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1952 With GST................................................................................................1952 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1952 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1953 Component Description...........................................................................................1953 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1953 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1953 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1953 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1954 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1954 WITH GST....................................................................................................1954 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1955 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1956 Component Inspection............................................................................................1959 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1959 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1959 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1959 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1960 Component Description...........................................................................................1960 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1960 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1960 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1960 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1961 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1961 WITH GST....................................................................................................1961 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1962 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1963 Component Inspection............................................................................................1966 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1966 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1966 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1966 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1967 Component Description...........................................................................................1967 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1967 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1967 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1967 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1968 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1968 WITH GST....................................................................................................1968 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1969 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1970 Component Inspection............................................................................................1973 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1973 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1973 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1973 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................1974 Component Description...........................................................................................1974 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1974 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1974 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1974 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1975 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1975 WITH GST....................................................................................................1975 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1976 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1977 Component Inspection............................................................................................1981 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1981 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1981 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1981 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1982 Component Description...........................................................................................1982 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1982 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1982 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1983 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1983 WITH GST....................................................................................................1983 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1984 BANK 1......................................................................................................1984 BANK 2......................................................................................................1986 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1987 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1993 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1993 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................1994 Component Description...........................................................................................1994 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1994 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1995 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1996 Component Inspection............................................................................................2000 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2000 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2000 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2001 Component Description...........................................................................................2001 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2001 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2002 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2003 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2004 Description.....................................................................................................2004 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2004 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2004 FUEL INJECTOR.......................................................................................................2006 Component Description...........................................................................................2006 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2006 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2007 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2008 Component Inspection............................................................................................2012 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2012 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2012 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2012 FUEL PUMP...........................................................................................................2013 Description.....................................................................................................2013 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2013 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2013 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2013 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2014 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2015 Component Inspection............................................................................................2018 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2018 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2018 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2018 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2019 Component Description...........................................................................................2019 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2019 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2020 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2021 Component Inspection............................................................................................2026 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2026 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2026 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2026 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2027 Component Description...........................................................................................2027 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2027 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2028 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2033 Component Inspection............................................................................................2038 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2038 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2039 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2039 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2039 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2040 Component Description...........................................................................................2040 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2041 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2042 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2044 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2044 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2045 Description.....................................................................................................2045 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2045 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2046 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2047 Component Inspection............................................................................................2049 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2049 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2050 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2050 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2052 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2052 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2052 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2052 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2052 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2052 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2052 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater............................................................................2052 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2052 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2052 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2052 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2052 Fuel Injector...................................................................................................2053 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2053 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2054 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................2054 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................2054 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................2058 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2062 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................2062 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...............................................................2062 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................2062 Precaution......................................................................................................2063 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2066 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2066 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2067 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................2068 System Diagram..................................................................................................2068 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................2069 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2069 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2069 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................2069 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................2070 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................2070 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................2070 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................2071 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................2071 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................2071 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................2071 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................2071 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2071 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2071 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................2072 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2072 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2072 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................2073 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................2073 System Description..............................................................................................2073 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2074 System Description..............................................................................................2074 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2074 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2074 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2074 ACCELERATE OPERATION........................................................................................2074 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2074 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2074 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2075 Component Description...........................................................................................2075 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2075 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2075 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2075 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2075 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2075 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................2076 System Description..............................................................................................2076 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2077 Description.....................................................................................................2077 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2077 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2078 Component Inspection............................................................................................2080 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2080 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)..................................................2080 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2080 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2080 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2080 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2080 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2081 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2081 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2081 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2081 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2081 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2082 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2082 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2084 System Description..............................................................................................2084 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2085 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2085 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2086 Component Inspection............................................................................................2087 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2087 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2087 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2088 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2089 Description.....................................................................................................2089 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2089 Component Inspection............................................................................................2089 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2089 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2090 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................2091 Description.....................................................................................................2091 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................2092 Introduction....................................................................................................2092 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................2092 Emission-related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................2093 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................2093 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................2097 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................2097 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................2098 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................2098 SRT Item................................................................................................2098 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................2099 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................2100 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................2101 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................2101 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................2102 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................2104 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................2105 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................2105 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................2107 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2107 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................2107 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................2108 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................2108 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................2108 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2108 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................2108 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................2108 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................2108 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2109 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................2109 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................2109 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................2110 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........2111 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........2112 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2112 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................2112 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................2113 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................2114 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................2114 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2114 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................2115 Basic Inspection................................................................................................2115 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................2120 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................2120 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2120 With GST................................................................................................2120 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................2120 Method A................................................................................................2120 Method B................................................................................................2120 Procedure After Replacing ECM...................................................................................2121 VIN Registration................................................................................................2121 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2121 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2121 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2121 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................2122 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2122 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2122 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................2122 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2122 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2122 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................2122 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2122 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2122 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2122 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2122 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2123 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................2124 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................2124 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................2124 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2124 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2125 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................2125 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................2126 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................2126 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................2126 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................2127 Overall Sequence........................................................................................2127 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................2128 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................2130 Description.............................................................................................2130 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................2131 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................2132 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................2134 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................2135 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................2135 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................2136 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................2139 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................2146 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................2147 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................2149 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................2149 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2149 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................2149 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................2158 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2158 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................2159 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2160 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................2160 Work Item...............................................................................................2160 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................2161 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................2161 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................2161 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................2162 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2162 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................2166 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2166 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................2167 Test Item...............................................................................................2167 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................2168 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................2168 SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2168 DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2168 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................2169 Description.............................................................................................2169 Operation...............................................................................................2170 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................2170 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2170 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2171 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2171 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................2173 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................2177 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................2177 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.............................................2177 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................2179 Description.....................................................................................................2179 Testing Condition...............................................................................................2179 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................2179 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2180 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................2180 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................2182 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................2189 Description.....................................................................................................2189 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2189 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................2190 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2190 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2191 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................2196 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................2197 Description.....................................................................................................2197 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2197 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2197 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2198 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2199 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................2200 Description.....................................................................................................2200 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2200 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2200 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2200 WITH GST....................................................................................................2200 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2201 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................2202 Description.....................................................................................................2202 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2202 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2202 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve..............................................................2202 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor.............................................................2203 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2203 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2203 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2203 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2204 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2204 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2204 With GST................................................................................................2204 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2204 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2204 With GST................................................................................................2204 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2205 BANK 1......................................................................................................2205 BANK 2......................................................................................................2207 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2208 Component Inspection............................................................................................2212 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2212 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2213 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2213 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2213 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2213 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER..................................................................2214 Description.....................................................................................................2214 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2214 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2214 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2214 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2214 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2214 WITH GST....................................................................................................2214 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2215 BANK 1......................................................................................................2215 BANK 2......................................................................................................2217 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2218 Component Inspection............................................................................................2220 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER........................................................................2220 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2220 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2220 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................2221 Description.....................................................................................................2221 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2221 OPERATION...................................................................................................2221 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2221 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2221 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2222 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2222 WITH GST....................................................................................................2222 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2223 BANK 1......................................................................................................2223 BANK 2......................................................................................................2225 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2226 Component Inspection............................................................................................2228 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................2228 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2228 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2228 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................2229 Component Description...........................................................................................2229 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2229 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2229 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2229 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2229 WITH GST....................................................................................................2229 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2230 BANK 1......................................................................................................2230 BANK 2......................................................................................................2232 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2234 Component Inspection............................................................................................2235 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2235 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2235 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2235 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2236 Component Description...........................................................................................2236 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2236 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2236 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2237 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2237 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2237 With GST................................................................................................2237 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2237 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2237 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2238 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2238 With GST................................................................................................2238 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2239 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2240 Component Inspection............................................................................................2243 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2243 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2243 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2243 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2244 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2244 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................2245 Component Description...........................................................................................2245 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2245 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2245 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2245 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2246 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................2246 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2246 With GST................................................................................................2246 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................2246 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2246 With GST................................................................................................2246 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2247 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2248 Component Inspection............................................................................................2250 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2250 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2250 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2251 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2251 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2251 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................2252 Component Description...........................................................................................2252 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2252 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2252 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2252 WITH GST....................................................................................................2253 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2254 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2255 Component Inspection............................................................................................2256 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2256 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2256 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2256 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................2257 Component Description...........................................................................................2257 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2257 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2257 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2258 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2258 WITH GST....................................................................................................2258 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2259 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2260 Component Inspection............................................................................................2262 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2262 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2262 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2262 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2263 Component Description...........................................................................................2263 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2263 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2263 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2263 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2264 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2264 WITH GST....................................................................................................2264 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2265 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2266 Component Inspection............................................................................................2269 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2269 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2269 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2269 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................2270 Component Description...........................................................................................2270 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2270 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2271 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2271 WITH GST....................................................................................................2271 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2271 Component Inspection............................................................................................2272 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2272 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2272 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2272 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................2273 Component Description...........................................................................................2273 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2273 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2273 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2273 WITH GST....................................................................................................2274 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2274 Component Inspection............................................................................................2275 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2275 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2275 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2275 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................2276 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2276 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2276 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2276 WITH GST....................................................................................................2276 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2276 Component Inspection............................................................................................2277 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2277 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2277 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2277 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2278 Component Description...........................................................................................2278 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2278 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2278 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2279 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2279 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2279 With GST................................................................................................2279 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2279 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2279 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2280 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2280 With GST................................................................................................2280 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2281 BANK 1......................................................................................................2281 BANK 2......................................................................................................2283 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2284 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2287 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2287 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2288 Component Description...........................................................................................2288 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2288 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2288 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2289 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2289 WITH GST....................................................................................................2289 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2290 BANK 1......................................................................................................2290 BANK 2......................................................................................................2292 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2293 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2296 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2296 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2297 Component Description...........................................................................................2297 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2297 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2297 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2298 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2298 WITH GST....................................................................................................2298 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2299 BANK 1......................................................................................................2299 BANK 2......................................................................................................2301 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2302 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2305 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2305 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2306 Component Description...........................................................................................2306 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2306 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2306 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2307 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2307 WITH GST....................................................................................................2308 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2309 BANK 1......................................................................................................2309 BANK 2......................................................................................................2311 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2312 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2317 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2317 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2..............................................................................................2318 Component Description...........................................................................................2318 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2318 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2318 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2319 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2319 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2320 WITH GST....................................................................................................2320 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2321 BANK 1......................................................................................................2321 BANK 2......................................................................................................2323 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2324 Component Inspection............................................................................................2327 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2327 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2327 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2328 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2328 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2328 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................2329 Component Description...........................................................................................2329 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2329 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2329 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2330 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2330 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2330 With GST................................................................................................2330 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2330 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2330 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2331 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2331 With GST................................................................................................2331 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2332 BANK 1......................................................................................................2332 BANK 2......................................................................................................2334 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2335 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2335 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2337 Component Inspection............................................................................................2340 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2340 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2340 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2341 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2341 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2341 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................2342 Component Description...........................................................................................2342 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2342 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2342 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2343 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2343 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2344 WITH GST....................................................................................................2344 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2345 BANK 1......................................................................................................2345 BANK 2......................................................................................................2347 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2348 Component Inspection............................................................................................2351 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2351 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2351 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2352 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2352 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2352 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2353 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2353 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2353 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2353 WITH GST....................................................................................................2354 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2355 BANK 1......................................................................................................2355 BANK 2......................................................................................................2357 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2359 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2364 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2364 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2364 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2364 WITH GST....................................................................................................2365 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2366 BANK 1......................................................................................................2366 BANK 2......................................................................................................2368 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2370 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................2375 Component Description...........................................................................................2375 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2375 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2375 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2375 WITH GST....................................................................................................2376 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2377 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2378 Component Inspection............................................................................................2380 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2380 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2380 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2380 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................2381 Component Description...........................................................................................2381 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2381 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2381 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2381 WITH GST....................................................................................................2381 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2382 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2383 Component Inspection............................................................................................2385 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2385 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2385 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2385 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2386 Component Description...........................................................................................2386 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2386 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2386 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2386 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2387 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2387 WITH GST....................................................................................................2387 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2388 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2389 Component Inspection............................................................................................2392 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2392 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2392 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2392 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................2393 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2393 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2394 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2394 WITH GST....................................................................................................2394 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2395 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS...................................................................................2403 Component Description...........................................................................................2403 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2403 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2403 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2403 WITH GST....................................................................................................2403 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2404 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2405 Component Inspection............................................................................................2407 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2407 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2407 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2407 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................2408 Component Description...........................................................................................2408 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2408 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2408 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2409 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2409 WITH GST....................................................................................................2409 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2410 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2411 Component Inspection............................................................................................2414 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2414 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2414 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2414 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)....................................................................2415 Component Description...........................................................................................2415 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2415 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2415 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2416 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2416 WITH GST....................................................................................................2416 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2417 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2418 Component Inspection............................................................................................2421 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2421 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2421 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2421 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................2422 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2422 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2422 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2422 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2423 WITH GST....................................................................................................2423 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2424 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2428 System Description..............................................................................................2428 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2428 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2428 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2429 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2429 WITH GST....................................................................................................2429 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2430 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2433 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2433 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2434 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2434 WITH GST....................................................................................................2436 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2436 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................2442 Description.....................................................................................................2442 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2442 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2442 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2442 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2443 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2443 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2443 WITH GST....................................................................................................2443 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2444 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2446 Component Inspection............................................................................................2449 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2449 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2449 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2449 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2449 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2449 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................2450 Description.....................................................................................................2450 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2450 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2450 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2450 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2451 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2451 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2451 WITH GST....................................................................................................2451 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2452 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2454 Component Inspection............................................................................................2455 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2455 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2455 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2455 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2456 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2456 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2457 Component Description...........................................................................................2457 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2457 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2457 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2458 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2458 WITH GST....................................................................................................2458 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2459 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2460 Component Inspection............................................................................................2462 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2462 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2462 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2463 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2464 Component Description...........................................................................................2464 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2464 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2464 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2465 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2465 WITH GST....................................................................................................2465 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2466 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2467 Component Inspection............................................................................................2468 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2468 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2468 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2469 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2470 Component Description...........................................................................................2470 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2470 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2470 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2471 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2471 WITH GST....................................................................................................2471 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2471 Component Inspection............................................................................................2472 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2472 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2473 Component Description...........................................................................................2473 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2473 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2473 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2474 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2474 WITH GST....................................................................................................2474 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2475 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2476 Component Inspection............................................................................................2478 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2478 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2479 Component Description...........................................................................................2479 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2479 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2479 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2480 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2480 WITH GST....................................................................................................2480 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2481 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2482 Component Inspection............................................................................................2486 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2486 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2487 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2487 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2488 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2488 WITH GST....................................................................................................2489 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2489 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2495 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2495 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2496 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2496 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2497 WITH GST....................................................................................................2497 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2498 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2504 Component Description...........................................................................................2504 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2504 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2504 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2504 WITH GST....................................................................................................2504 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2505 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2505 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2505 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2506 Component Description...........................................................................................2506 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2506 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2506 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2506 WITH GST....................................................................................................2507 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2507 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2507 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2507 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................2508 Component Description...........................................................................................2508 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2508 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2508 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2508 WITH GST....................................................................................................2508 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2509 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2509 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2509 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................2510 Description.....................................................................................................2510 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2510 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2510 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2510 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2510 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2511 WITH GST....................................................................................................2511 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2511 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2512 Description.....................................................................................................2512 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2512 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2512 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2512 WITH GST....................................................................................................2512 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2513 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2514 Description.....................................................................................................2514 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2514 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2514 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2514 WITH GST....................................................................................................2514 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2515 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................2516 Component Description...........................................................................................2516 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2516 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2516 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2516 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2516 WITH GST....................................................................................................2516 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2517 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2518 Component Inspection............................................................................................2520 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2520 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2520 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2520 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................2521 Component Description...........................................................................................2521 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2521 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2521 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2521 WITH GST....................................................................................................2521 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2522 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2523 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................2525 Component Description...........................................................................................2525 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2525 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2525 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2525 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2525 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2525 With GST................................................................................................2525 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2526 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2526 With GST................................................................................................2526 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2526 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2526 With GST................................................................................................2526 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2526 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................2528 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2528 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2528 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2528 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2528 WITH GST....................................................................................................2528 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2529 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2531 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2533 Component Description...........................................................................................2533 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2533 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2533 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2533 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2533 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2534 WITH GST....................................................................................................2534 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2535 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2536 DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR........................................................................2538 Component Description...........................................................................................2538 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2538 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2538 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2538 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2538 WITH GST....................................................................................................2539 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2540 BANK 1......................................................................................................2540 BANK 2......................................................................................................2542 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2543 Component Inspection............................................................................................2546 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2546 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2546 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2546 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................2547 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2547 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................2548 Description.....................................................................................................2548 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2548 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2548 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2548 WITH GST....................................................................................................2548 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2548 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................2549 Description.....................................................................................................2549 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2549 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2549 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2549 WITH GST....................................................................................................2549 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2549 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................2550 Description.....................................................................................................2550 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2550 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................2550 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................2550 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................2551 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2551 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................2551 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2551 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2551 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2552 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2552 WITH GST....................................................................................................2552 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2554 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2556 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................2558 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................2560 Main 13 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................2560 Component Inspection............................................................................................2561 COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................................................................2561 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2562 Component Description...........................................................................................2562 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2562 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2562 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2562 WITH GST....................................................................................................2562 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2563 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2563 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2563 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2564 Component Description...........................................................................................2564 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2564 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2564 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2564 WITH GST....................................................................................................2564 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2565 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2565 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2565 DTC P1421 COLD START CONTROL........................................................................................2566 Description.....................................................................................................2566 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2566 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2566 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2566 WITH GST....................................................................................................2566 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2566 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2568 Component Description...........................................................................................2568 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2568 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2568 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2569 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2569 WITH GST....................................................................................................2569 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2570 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2571 Component Inspection............................................................................................2574 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2574 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2575 Component Description...........................................................................................2575 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2575 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2575 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2576 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2576 WITH GST....................................................................................................2576 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2577 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2578 Component Inspection............................................................................................2581 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2581 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2582 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2582 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2582 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2582 WITH GST....................................................................................................2582 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2582 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2583 Component Description...........................................................................................2583 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2583 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2583 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2584 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2584 WITH GST....................................................................................................2584 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2585 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2586 Component Inspection............................................................................................2591 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2591 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2591 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2591 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2592 Component Description...........................................................................................2592 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2592 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2592 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2593 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2593 WITH GST....................................................................................................2593 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2594 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2595 Component Inspection............................................................................................2599 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2599 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2599 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2600 Component Description...........................................................................................2600 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2600 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2600 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2600 WITH GST....................................................................................................2600 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2601 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2602 Component Description...........................................................................................2602 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2602 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2602 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2602 WITH GST....................................................................................................2602 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2603 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)............................................................2604 Description.....................................................................................................2604 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2604 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2604 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2604 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...............................................................................2605 Component Description...........................................................................................2605 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2605 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2605 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2605 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2605 WITH GST....................................................................................................2605 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2606 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2607 Component Inspection............................................................................................2608 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2608 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2608 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2608 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2609 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2609 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2610 Description.....................................................................................................2610 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2610 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2610 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2610 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2610 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2610 WITH GST....................................................................................................2610 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2611 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2612 Component Inspection............................................................................................2614 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2614 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................2615 Component Description...........................................................................................2615 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2615 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2615 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2615 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2615 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100.....................................................................................2615 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2615 With GST................................................................................................2615 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103.....................................................................................2616 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2616 With GST................................................................................................2616 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2617 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2618 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................2621 Description.....................................................................................................2621 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2621 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2621 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2621 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2621 WITH GST....................................................................................................2621 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2622 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2623 Component Inspection............................................................................................2627 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2627 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2627 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2627 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................2628 Component Description...........................................................................................2628 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2628 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2628 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2628 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2628 WITH GST....................................................................................................2628 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2629 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2630 Component Inspection............................................................................................2631 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2631 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2632 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2632 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................2633 Component Description...........................................................................................2633 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2633 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2633 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2633 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................2633 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2633 With GST................................................................................................2633 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2634 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2634 With GST................................................................................................2634 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2634 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2635 Component Description...........................................................................................2635 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2635 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2635 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2635 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2636 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2636 WITH GST....................................................................................................2636 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2637 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2638 Component Inspection............................................................................................2640 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2640 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2641 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2641 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2642 Component Description...........................................................................................2642 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2642 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2642 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2642 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2643 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2643 WITH GST....................................................................................................2643 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2644 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2645 Component Inspection............................................................................................2648 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2648 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2648 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2648 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2649 Component Description...........................................................................................2649 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2649 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2649 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2649 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2650 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2650 WITH GST....................................................................................................2650 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2651 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2652 Component Inspection............................................................................................2655 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2655 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2655 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2655 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2656 Component Description...........................................................................................2656 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2656 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2656 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2656 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2657 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2657 WITH GST....................................................................................................2657 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2658 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2659 Component Inspection............................................................................................2663 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2663 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2663 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2663 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2664 Component Description...........................................................................................2664 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2664 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2664 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2665 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2665 WITH GST....................................................................................................2665 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2666 BANK 1......................................................................................................2666 BANK 2......................................................................................................2668 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2669 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2675 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2675 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2676 Component Description...........................................................................................2676 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2676 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2677 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2678 Component Inspection............................................................................................2682 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2682 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2682 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2683 Component Description...........................................................................................2683 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2683 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2684 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2685 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2686 Description.....................................................................................................2686 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2686 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2686 FUEL INJECTOR.......................................................................................................2688 Component Description...........................................................................................2688 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2688 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2689 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2690 Component Inspection............................................................................................2694 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2694 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2694 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2694 FUEL PUMP...........................................................................................................2695 Description.....................................................................................................2695 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2695 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2695 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2695 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2696 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2697 Component Inspection............................................................................................2700 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2700 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2700 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2700 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2701 Component Description...........................................................................................2701 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2701 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2702 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2703 Component Inspection............................................................................................2708 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2708 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2708 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2708 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2709 Component Description...........................................................................................2709 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2709 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2710 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2715 Component Inspection............................................................................................2720 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2720 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2720 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2721 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2721 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2722 Component Description...........................................................................................2722 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2723 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2724 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2726 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2726 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2727 Description.....................................................................................................2727 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2727 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2728 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2729 Component Inspection............................................................................................2731 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2731 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)........................................................................2732 Description.....................................................................................................2732 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2732 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2733 Power Valve.............................................................................................2733 VIAS Control Solenoid Valve.............................................................................2733 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2733 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2734 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2736 Component Inspection............................................................................................2739 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2739 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2739 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2740 VACUUM TANK.................................................................................................2740 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2740 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2740 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2741 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2741 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2743 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2743 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2743 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2743 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2743 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2743 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2743 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor....................................................................................2743 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2743 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2743 A/F Sensor 1 Heater.............................................................................................2743 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2744 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2744 Fuel Injector...................................................................................................2744 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2744 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 ei..............................................................................................................................2746 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2746 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................2748 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................2748 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................2748 Precautions for Work................................................................................................2748 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................2749 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................2749 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................2749 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................2750 Work Flow...........................................................................................................2750 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................2750 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................2751 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................2751 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................2751 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................2751 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................2752 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................2752 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................2752 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................2752 DOORS...........................................................................................................2752 TRUNK...........................................................................................................2753 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................2753 SEATS...........................................................................................................2753 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................2753 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................2754 CLIP AND FASTENER.......................................................................................................2756 Clip and Fastener...................................................................................................2756 FRONT BUMPER............................................................................................................2759 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2759 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2760 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2761 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FILLET MOLDING......................................................................2761 Removal.....................................................................................................2761 Installation................................................................................................2761 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF BUMPER CENTER MOLDING...............................................................2761 Removal.....................................................................................................2761 Installation................................................................................................2761 REAR BUMPER.............................................................................................................2762 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2762 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2763 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2764 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF REAR BUMPER FASCIA..................................................................2764 Disassembly.................................................................................................2764 Assembly....................................................................................................2765 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR BUMPER CLOSING.................................................................2765 Removal.....................................................................................................2765 Installation................................................................................................2765 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF DRAFTER GUARD.......................................................................2765 Removal.....................................................................................................2765 Installation................................................................................................2765 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY........................................................2766 Removal.....................................................................................................2766 Installation................................................................................................2766 FRONT GRILLE............................................................................................................2767 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2767 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2767 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2767 COWL TOP................................................................................................................2768 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2768 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2768 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2768 FENDER PROTECTOR........................................................................................................2769 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2769 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2769 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2769 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING....................................................................................................2770 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2770 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING......................................................................................2770 Removal.....................................................................................................2770 Installation................................................................................................2770 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................2770 Removal.....................................................................................................2770 Installation................................................................................................2770 DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING..............................................................................................2771 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2771 FRONT AND REAR DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING.......................................................................2771 Removal.....................................................................................................2771 Installation................................................................................................2771 DOOR PARTING SEAL.......................................................................................................2772 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2772 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2772 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2773 CENTER MUD GUARD........................................................................................................2774 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2774 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2774 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2774 WINDSHIELD MOLDING......................................................................................................2775 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2775 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2775 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2775 BACK DOOR WINDOW MOLDING................................................................................................2776 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2776 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2776 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2776 ROOF SIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................................2778 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2778 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2778 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2778 ROOF RAIL...............................................................................................................2779 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2779 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2779 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2779 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ROOF RAIL BRACKET...................................................................2779 Removal.....................................................................................................2779 Installation................................................................................................2779 BACK DOOR FINISHER......................................................................................................2780 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2780 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2780 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2780 DOOR FINISHER...........................................................................................................2781 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2781 DOOR FINISHER (FRONT AND REAR)..................................................................................2781 Removal.....................................................................................................2781 Installation................................................................................................2782 BODY SIDE TRIM..........................................................................................................2783 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2783 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH.....................................................................................2783 Removal.....................................................................................................2783 Installation................................................................................................2784 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH.....................................................................................2784 Removal.....................................................................................................2784 Installation................................................................................................2784 DASH SIDE FINISHER..............................................................................................2784 Removal.....................................................................................................2784 Installation................................................................................................2784 FRONT PILLAR GARNISH............................................................................................2785 Removal.....................................................................................................2785 Installation................................................................................................2785 KICKING PLATE...................................................................................................2785 Removal.....................................................................................................2785 Installation................................................................................................2785 CENTER MUDGUARD FINISHER (FRONT/REAR)...........................................................................2785 Removal.....................................................................................................2785 Installation................................................................................................2785 FLOOR TRIM..............................................................................................................2786 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2786 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2786 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2787 HEADLINING..............................................................................................................2788 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2788 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2789 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2789 LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM......................................................................................................2790 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2790 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2791 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2791 BACK DOOR TRIM..........................................................................................................2792 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2792 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2792 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2792 em..............................................................................................................................2794 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2794 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................2798 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2798 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2798 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2798 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................2798 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2798 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2798 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2798 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2798 Precautions for Angle Tightening................................................................................2799 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2799 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2799 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2799 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2801 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2801 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2803 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2806 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................2806 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2807 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2808 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2808 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2808 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.................................................................2809 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.........................................................................................2809 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2809 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2809 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2809 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2810 Components......................................................................................................2810 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2810 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2810 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2810 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2811 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2811 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2811 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2811 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2811 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR...........................................................................................2812 Components......................................................................................................2812 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2812 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2812 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2814 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2814 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2815 Part Installation Direction.............................................................................2815 Intake Manifold Collector (Lower).......................................................................2815 Intake Manifold Collector (Upper).......................................................................2815 Water Hose..............................................................................................2815 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2816 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2817 Components......................................................................................................2817 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2817 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2817 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2818 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2818 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2818 Intake Manifold.........................................................................................2818 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2819 Components......................................................................................................2819 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2819 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2819 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2821 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2821 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2821 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2821 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2821 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 and Heated Oxygen Sensor 2......................................................2822 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2823 Components (2WD Models).........................................................................................2823 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)...........................................................................2823 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2823 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2825 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2825 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2828 Components (AWD Models).........................................................................................2828 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)...........................................................................2829 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2829 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2831 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2831 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2834 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2835 Components......................................................................................................2835 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2835 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2835 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2835 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2836 Components......................................................................................................2836 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2836 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2836 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2836 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2837 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2838 Components......................................................................................................2838 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2838 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2838 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2840 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2843 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2843 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2844 Components......................................................................................................2844 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2844 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2844 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2845 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE.............................................................................................2847 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2847 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2847 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2851 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2855 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2855 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2857 Components......................................................................................................2857 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2858 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2858 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2865 Timing Chain............................................................................................2865 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2865 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2875 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2875 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2876 Components......................................................................................................2876 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2877 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2877 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2878 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2878 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2879 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................2879 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2880 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2880 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2880 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2881 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2881 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2885 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................2885 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2885 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2886 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2886 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2889 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2891 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2891 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2891 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2891 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2892 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2892 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2892 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2892 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2892 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2893 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2894 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2894 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2894 Components......................................................................................................2895 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2895 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2895 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2896 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................2896 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2896 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2897 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2898 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2898 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2899 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2899 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2900 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2901 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2901 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2901 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2901 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2901 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2902 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2902 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2903 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2903 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2904 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2905 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2906 Components (2WD Models).........................................................................................2906 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)...........................................................................2906 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2907 Outline.................................................................................................2907 Preparation.............................................................................................2907 Engine Room.............................................................................................2907 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2907 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2908 Removal Work............................................................................................2908 Separation Work.........................................................................................2909 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2909 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2910 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2910 Components (AWD Models).........................................................................................2911 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)...........................................................................2911 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2912 Outline.................................................................................................2912 Preparation.............................................................................................2912 Engine Room.............................................................................................2912 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2912 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2913 Removal Work............................................................................................2913 Separation Work.........................................................................................2914 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2914 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2915 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2915 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2916 Components......................................................................................................2916 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2917 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2917 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2922 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2929 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2929 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2929 When New Cylinder Block is Used.........................................................................2929 When Cylinder Block is Reused...........................................................................2929 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2930 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2930 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2930 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused...........................................................2930 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2930 Undersize Bearings Usage Guide..........................................................................2930 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2931 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2931 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused...........................................................2931 Main Bearing Selection Table............................................................................2932 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................2933 Undersize Bearing Usage Guide...........................................................................2933 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2934 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................2934 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................2934 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................2934 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................2934 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2934 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................2934 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................2935 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................2935 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................2936 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................2936 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2936 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................2936 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2937 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................2937 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................2937 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................2938 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................2938 Cylinder Bore inner Diameter............................................................................2938 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................2939 Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................2939 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................2939 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................2939 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................2940 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................2940 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................2940 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2940 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2940 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2941 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................2941 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2941 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2941 MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT...................................................................................2942 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT.........................................................................2942 MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER........................................................................2942 CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER..........................................................................2943 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................2943 OIL JET.....................................................................................................2943 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................2943 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2944 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................2944 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................2944 DRIVE BELT..................................................................................................2945 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD.............................................2945 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................2945 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................2946 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2946 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................2946 Available Valve Lifter..................................................................................2947 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................2948 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................2948 Valve Guide.............................................................................................2949 Valve Seat..............................................................................................2950 Valve Spring............................................................................................2950 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................2951 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................2952 Available Piston........................................................................................2952 Piston Ring.............................................................................................2952 Piston Pin..............................................................................................2952 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................2953 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................2954 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................2955 Undersize...............................................................................................2955 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................2955 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................2956 Undersize...............................................................................................2956 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................2956 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2957 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2957 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2957 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2957 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................2957 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2957 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2957 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2957 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2957 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................2958 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2958 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2958 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2958 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2960 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2960 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2962 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2964 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................2964 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2965 ENGINE ROOM COVER...................................................................................................2966 Components......................................................................................................2966 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2966 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2966 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2966 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2967 Components......................................................................................................2967 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2967 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2967 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2967 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2967 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................2967 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................2968 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2968 Components......................................................................................................2969 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley......................................................................2969 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2969 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2969 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2970 Components......................................................................................................2970 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2970 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2970 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2971 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2971 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2971 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2971 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2971 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2972 Components......................................................................................................2972 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2973 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2973 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2975 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2975 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2975 Intake Manifold (Lower).................................................................................2975 Intake Manifold (Upper).................................................................................2975 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2975 Water Hose..............................................................................................2975 Vacuum Hose.............................................................................................2975 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2975 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2976 Components......................................................................................................2976 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2976 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2976 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2978 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2978 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2978 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2978 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2979 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor and Heated Oxygen Sensor..........................................................2979 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2980 Components......................................................................................................2980 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2980 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2980 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2982 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2982 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2983 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2984 Components......................................................................................................2984 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2984 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2984 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2984 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2985 Components......................................................................................................2985 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2985 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2985 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2985 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2986 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2987 Components......................................................................................................2987 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2987 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2987 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2989 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2991 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2991 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2993 Components......................................................................................................2993 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2993 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2993 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2995 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2996 Components......................................................................................................2996 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2997 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2997 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3001 Timing Chain............................................................................................3001 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3001 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3007 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3007 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................3008 Components......................................................................................................3008 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3008 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3008 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3009 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................3009 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................3010 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................3010 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................3011 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................3011 Valve Lifter and Adjusting Shim.........................................................................3011 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................3012 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3012 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3014 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................3014 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................3015 INSPECTION..................................................................................................3015 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................3017 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................3021 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................3021 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3021 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3021 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................3022 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3022 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3022 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................3023 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3023 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3023 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................3025 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................3025 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................3025 Components......................................................................................................3026 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3026 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3026 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3027 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................3027 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................3027 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3027 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3029 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3029 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3029 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3030 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3031 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................3031 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................3032 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................3032 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................3032 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................3032 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................3032 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................3034 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3034 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................3035 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................3035 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3036 Components......................................................................................................3036 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3036 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3036 Outline.................................................................................................3036 Preparation.............................................................................................3037 Engine Room LH..........................................................................................3037 Engine Room RH..........................................................................................3037 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................3037 Removal Work............................................................................................3038 Separation Work.........................................................................................3039 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3039 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3039 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3039 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................3041 Components......................................................................................................3041 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3042 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3042 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3046 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................3051 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................3051 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................3052 When New Cylinder Block is Used:........................................................................3052 When Cylinder Block is Reused:..........................................................................3052 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................3052 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................3053 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3053 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused:..........................................................3053 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................3053 Under Size Bearings Usage Guide.........................................................................3053 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................3054 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3054 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused:..........................................................3054 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 1 and 5 Journal)......................................................3055 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 Journal)...................................................3056 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................3057 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide.......................................................................3057 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3058 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................3058 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................3058 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................3058 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................3058 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3058 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................3058 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................3059 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................3059 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................3060 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................3060 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3060 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................3060 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3061 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................3061 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................3061 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................3062 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................3062 Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter............................................................................3062 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................3063 Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................3063 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................3063 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................3063 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................3064 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................3064 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................3064 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3065 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3065 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3065 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................3066 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3066 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3066 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................3067 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................3067 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................3067 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3068 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3068 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................3068 DRIVE BELTS.................................................................................................3068 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................................................................3068 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................3069 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................3069 Valve Lifter............................................................................................3069 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................3069 Available Adjusting Shims...............................................................................3070 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................3071 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................3072 Valve Guide.............................................................................................3072 Valve Seat..............................................................................................3073 Valve Spring............................................................................................3073 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................3074 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3075 Available Piston........................................................................................3075 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3075 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3075 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3076 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3077 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................3079 Undersize...............................................................................................3079 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................3080 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3080 Undersize...............................................................................................3080 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................3080 ex..............................................................................................................................3082 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3082 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3083 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3083 EXHAUST SYSTEM..........................................................................................................3084 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3084 Components..........................................................................................................3084 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3085 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3085 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3085 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3086 fax.............................................................................................................................3088 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3088 2WD.....................................................................................................................3089 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3089 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3089 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3089 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3090 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3090 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3091 On-Vehicle Inspection...........................................................................................3091 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3091 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3091 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3091 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3091 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3092 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3092 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3092 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3093 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3093 AWD.....................................................................................................................3094 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3094 Caution.........................................................................................................3094 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3095 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3095 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3095 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3096 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3096 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3097 On-Vehicle Inspection...........................................................................................3097 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3097 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3097 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3097 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3097 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3098 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3098 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3098 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT...................................................................................................3099 On-Vehicle Inspection...........................................................................................3099 DRIVE SHAFT BOOT REPLACEMENT................................................................................3099 Removal and Installation (Left Side)............................................................................3102 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3102 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3102 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3102 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3102 Removal and Installation (Right Side)...........................................................................3103 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3103 Removal.....................................................................................................3103 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3103 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3104 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)............................................................................3105 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3105 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3105 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3105 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3106 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3106 Shaft...................................................................................................3106 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3106 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3106 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3107 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3107 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3108 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)...........................................................................3109 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3109 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3109 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3109 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3110 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3110 Shaft...................................................................................................3110 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3110 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3110 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3111 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3111 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3112 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3113 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3113 Drive Shaft.....................................................................................................3113 ffd.............................................................................................................................3114 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3114 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3115 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................3115 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3116 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3116 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3118 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3119 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3119 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................3120 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................3120 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................3121 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3121 DRAINING........................................................................................................3121 FILLING.........................................................................................................3121 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3121 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................3121 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3122 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3122 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3122 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3123 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3124 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3124 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3124 Right Side:.................................................................................................3124 Left Side:..................................................................................................3124 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3124 Right Side:.................................................................................................3124 Left Side:..................................................................................................3124 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3126 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3126 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3126 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3126 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3126 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3128 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3128 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3128 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3128 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3130 COMPONENTS (VQ35DE MODELS)......................................................................................3130 COMPONENTS (VK45DE MODELS)......................................................................................3132 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3133 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................3133 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3134 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3134 Backlash....................................................................................................3136 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3136 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3137 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3137 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3137 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3140 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3141 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS (SHIMS)...........................................................3142 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................3142 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................3142 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................3144 Pinion Bearing Preload......................................................................................3144 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3145 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3145 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3147 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3151 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3152 General Specifications..............................................................................................3152 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................3152 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................3152 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................3152 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................3152 BACKLASH........................................................................................................3152 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................3152 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................3152 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................3152 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................3153 Drive Pinion Bearing Adjusting Washer.......................................................................3153 Drive Pinion Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3153 Side Bearing Adjusting Shim.................................................................................3153 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3153 fl..............................................................................................................................3154 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3154 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3155 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3155 FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................3156 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3156 General Precautions.................................................................................................3156 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY..............................................................3157 Components..........................................................................................................3157 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3157 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3157 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3159 Main and Sub Fuel Level Sensor Unit.........................................................................3160 Quick Connector.............................................................................................3160 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3160 Components..........................................................................................................3161 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3161 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3161 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3162 FUEL TANK...............................................................................................................3163 Components..........................................................................................................3163 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3163 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3163 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3164 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3164 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3165 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3165 FUEL TANK.......................................................................................................3165 fsu.............................................................................................................................3166 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3166 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3167 Caution.............................................................................................................3167 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3168 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3168 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3169 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3170 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3170 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3171 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3171 INSPECTION LOWER BALL JOINT END PLAY............................................................................3171 STRUT INSPECTION................................................................................................3171 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3171 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3171 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3171 GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS.........................................................................3171 THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS...........................................................................................3172 INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES.....................................................3172 Using a CCK Gauge...........................................................................................3172 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3173 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3173 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3174 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3175 COIL SPRING AND STRUT...................................................................................................3176 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3176 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3176 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3176 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3177 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3177 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3177 Strut Inspection............................................................................................3177 Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection..............................................................3177 Coil Spring Inspection......................................................................................3177 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3178 TRANSVERSE LINK.........................................................................................................3179 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3179 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3179 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3179 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3179 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3179 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3180 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3180 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3180 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3180 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3181 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3181 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3181 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3181 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3181 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER.................................................................................................3182 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3182 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3182 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3182 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3182 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3183 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)..........................................................................................3183 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3183 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3183 gi..............................................................................................................................3184 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3184 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3186 Description.........................................................................................................3186 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3186 Precautions for NVIS/IVIS (NISSAN/INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - NATS) (If Equipped).........................3186 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3187 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3187 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3187 General Precautions.................................................................................................3187 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst..................................................................................3189 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)........................................................3189 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Required)...........................................................3190 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System............................................3190 Precautions for Hoses...............................................................................................3190 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION...................................................................................3190 HOSE CLAMPING...................................................................................................3191 Precautions for Engine Oils.........................................................................................3191 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................3191 Precautions for the Environment.....................................................................................3191 Precautions for Air Conditioning....................................................................................3192 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................................................................................3193 Description.........................................................................................................3193 Terms...............................................................................................................3193 Units...............................................................................................................3193 Contents............................................................................................................3193 Components..........................................................................................................3194 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................................3194 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................................................3195 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3195 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..................................................................3195 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION..............................................................3196 TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration...................................3196 TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text...........................................3197 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES............................................................3197 How to Read Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................3199 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS...............................................................................................3199 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -................................................................................3200 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3201 Harness Indication..........................................................................................3203 Component Indication........................................................................................3203 Switch Positions............................................................................................3203 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines...................................................................3204 Multiple Switch.............................................................................................3205 Reference Area..............................................................................................3206 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................3207 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT.............................................................................3208 How to Check Terminal...............................................................................................3208 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT..................................................................................3208 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS.........................................................................................3208 Probing from Harness Side...................................................................................3208 Probing from Terminal Side..................................................................................3208 How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal............................................................3209 Waterproof Connector Inspection.............................................................................3210 Terminal Lock Inspection....................................................................................3210 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident.......................................................3211 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................3211 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS.......................................................................................3211 Introduction................................................................................................3211 Vehicle Vibration...........................................................................................3212 Heat Sensitive..............................................................................................3213 Freezing....................................................................................................3213 Water Intrusion.............................................................................................3213 Electrical Load.............................................................................................3213 Cold or Hot Start Up........................................................................................3214 CIRCUIT INSPECTION..............................................................................................3214 Introduction................................................................................................3214 Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit..........................................................................3214 Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit.........................................................................3215 Ground Inspection...........................................................................................3216 Voltage Drop Tests..........................................................................................3216 Control Unit Circuit Test...................................................................................3218 Control Units and Electrical Parts..................................................................................3219 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................................3219 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM..............................................................................................3220 Description.........................................................................................................3220 Function and System Application.....................................................................................3220 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement............................................................................3221 Checking Equipment..................................................................................................3221 CONSULT-II Start Procedure..........................................................................................3221 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit........................................................................3222 INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................3222 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................................................................................3223 LIFTING POINT...........................................................................................................3224 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3224 Garage Jack and Safety Stand........................................................................................3224 2-Pole Lift.........................................................................................................3225 Board-On Lift.......................................................................................................3226 TOW TRUCK TOWING........................................................................................................3227 Tow Truck Towing....................................................................................................3227 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3227 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3228 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)..........................................................................3228 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..........................................................................................3229 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS.....................................................................................3230 Tightening Torque Table.............................................................................................3230 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS..............................................................................3231 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants..........................................................................3231 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION..............................................................................................3232 Model Variation.....................................................................................................3232 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER...........................................................................................3233 IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................3233 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................3234 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER...................................................................................3234 Dimensions..........................................................................................................3234 Wheels & Tires......................................................................................................3234 TERMINOLOGY.............................................................................................................3235 SAE J1930 Terminology List..........................................................................................3235 gw..............................................................................................................................3240 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3240 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3242 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3242 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3242 Handling for Adhesive and Primer....................................................................................3242 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3243 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3243 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3243 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3244 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3244 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3244 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3245 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3245 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3245 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3245 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3246 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3246 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3246 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3246 DOORS...........................................................................................................3246 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3247 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3247 SEATS...........................................................................................................3247 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3247 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3248 WINDSHIELD GLASS........................................................................................................3250 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3250 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3250 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3251 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield........................................................................3251 BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS..................................................................................................3252 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3252 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3252 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3253 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM.....................................................................................................3254 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3254 System Description..................................................................................................3255 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................3255 Front Driver Side Door......................................................................................3255 Front Passenger Side Door...................................................................................3255 Rear Door (LH or RH)........................................................................................3256 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3257 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK........................................................................................3258 POWER WINDOW LOCK...............................................................................................3258 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3258 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM...............................................................................................3258 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.................................................................3258 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3259 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3259 Schematic...........................................................................................................3260 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —...........................................................................................3261 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3265 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch...........................................................3266 Terminal and Reference Value for Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side).........................................3267 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3268 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................3268 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3268 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3268 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................3268 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3269 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3269 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................3271 Check Power Window Main Switch Power Supply Circuit.................................................................3272 Check Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) Power Supply and Ground Circuit....................................3273 Check Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) Circuit................................................................3274 Check Front Power Window Motor (Passenger Side) Circuit.............................................................3275 Check rear Power Window Motor (LH) Circuit..........................................................................3275 Check Rear Power Window Motor (RH) Circuit..........................................................................3278 Check Limit Switch Circuit (Driver Side)............................................................................3280 Check Limit Switch Circuit (Passenger Side).........................................................................3282 Check Encoder Circuit (Driver Side).................................................................................3283 Check Encoder Circuit (Passenger Side)..............................................................................3285 Check Door Switch...................................................................................................3288 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch................................................................................3290 Check Power Window Serial Link (Passenger Side).....................................................................3292 Check Power Window Lock Switch......................................................................................3294 SIDE WINDOW GLASS.......................................................................................................3295 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3295 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3295 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3296 Repairing Water Leaks.......................................................................................3296 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR..........................................................................................3297 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3297 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3297 Removal.....................................................................................................3297 Installation................................................................................................3298 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3298 Removal.....................................................................................................3298 Installation................................................................................................3298 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3299 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3299 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3299 Disassembly.................................................................................................3299 Assembly....................................................................................................3299 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3299 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH.........................................................................................3299 Setting of Limit Switch.....................................................................................3299 Resetting...................................................................................................3299 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3299 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR...........................................................................................3301 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3301 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3301 Removal.....................................................................................................3301 Installation................................................................................................3302 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3302 Removal.....................................................................................................3302 Installation................................................................................................3303 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3303 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3303 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3303 Disassembly.................................................................................................3303 Assembly....................................................................................................3303 Fitting Inspection..................................................................................................3303 INSIDE MIRROR...........................................................................................................3304 Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —...........................................................................................3304 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3305 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3305 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3305 COMPASS.........................................................................................................3305 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER....................................................................................................3306 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3306 System Description..................................................................................................3306 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3307 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3307 Schematic...........................................................................................................3308 Wiring Diagram — DEF —..............................................................................................3309 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3313 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R...........................................................................3313 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3314 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................3314 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3314 Display Item List...........................................................................................3314 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3314 Display Item List...........................................................................................3314 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)......................................................................................3314 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................3314 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3314 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3314 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3315 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3315 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................3316 Check Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit...........................................................................3317 Check rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit.....................................................................3318 Check Rear Window Defogger Circuit..................................................................................3320 Check Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit.....................................................................3321 Check Driver Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit......................................................................3323 Check Passenger Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit...................................................................3324 Check Rear Window Defogger Signal...................................................................................3324 Check Filament......................................................................................................3326 Filament Repair.....................................................................................................3326 REPAIR EQUIPMENT................................................................................................3326 REPAIRING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3327 DOOR MIRROR.............................................................................................................3328 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — (Without Electric Foldable Door Mirror)...................................................3328 Schematic (With Electric Foldable Door Mirror)......................................................................3330 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — (With Electric Foldable Door Mirror)......................................................3331 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................3336 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3337 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3337 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3337 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3337 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3337 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3338 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 idx.............................................................................................................................3340 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3341 A.......................................................................................................................3341 B.......................................................................................................................3341 C.......................................................................................................................3342 D.......................................................................................................................3342 E.......................................................................................................................3342 F.......................................................................................................................3343 G.......................................................................................................................3343 H.......................................................................................................................3343 I.......................................................................................................................3344 K.......................................................................................................................3344 L.......................................................................................................................3344 M.......................................................................................................................3344 N.......................................................................................................................3345 O.......................................................................................................................3345 P.......................................................................................................................3345 R.......................................................................................................................3345 S.......................................................................................................................3346 T.......................................................................................................................3346 U.......................................................................................................................3346 V.......................................................................................................................3346 W.......................................................................................................................3347 ip..............................................................................................................................3348 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3348 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3349 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3349 Precautions.........................................................................................................3349 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3350 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3350 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3350 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3351 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3351 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3351 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3352 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3352 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3352 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3352 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3353 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3353 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3353 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3353 DOORS...........................................................................................................3353 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3354 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3354 SEATS...........................................................................................................3354 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3354 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3355 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3357 Component Parts Drawing.............................................................................................3357 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3358 WORK STEP.......................................................................................................3358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3359 (A) Front Kicking Plate (RH/LH).............................................................................3359 (B) Dash Side Finisher (RH/LH)..............................................................................3359 (C) Front Pillar Garnish (RH/LH)............................................................................3359 (D) A/T Select Lever Knob...................................................................................3359 (E) Instrument Clock Finisher...............................................................................3359 (F) A/T Console Finisher....................................................................................3359 (G) Instrument Side Panel (RH/LH)...........................................................................3359 (H) Center Console..........................................................................................3359 (I) Instrument Lower Cover..................................................................................3360 (J) Instrument Passenger Lower Panel........................................................................3360 (K) Instrument Driver Lower Panel...........................................................................3360 (L) Steering Column Front Lower Cover.......................................................................3360 (M) Steering Column Lower Cover.............................................................................3360 (N) Steering Column Upper Cover.............................................................................3361 (O) Wiper and Washer Switch.................................................................................3361 (P) Lighting and Turn Signal Switch.........................................................................3361 (Q) Steering Lock Escutcheon................................................................................3361 (R) Combination Meter Assembly..............................................................................3361 (S) Cluster Lid C...........................................................................................3361 (T) Display Unit and Audio Unit.............................................................................3362 (U) Front Defroster Grille (RH/LH)..........................................................................3362 (V) Combination Meter Bracket...............................................................................3362 (W) Side Ventilation (RH/LH)................................................................................3362 (X) Instrument Panel and Pad................................................................................3362 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3362 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3363 A/T CONSOLE FINISHER............................................................................................3363 Disassembly.................................................................................................3363 Assembly....................................................................................................3363 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3364 Disassembly.................................................................................................3364 Assembly....................................................................................................3364 INSTRUMENT PASSENGER LOWER PANEL................................................................................3365 Disassembly.................................................................................................3365 Assembly....................................................................................................3365 lan.............................................................................................................................3366 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3366 CAN FUNDAMENTAL.........................................................................................................3368 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3368 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3368 Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3368 Precautions for Harness Repair..................................................................................3368 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................3369 CAN Communication System........................................................................................3369 SYSTEM DIAGRAM..............................................................................................3369 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT...........................................................................3370 Diag on CAN.....................................................................................................3371 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................3371 System Diagram..............................................................................................3371 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................3372 Condition of Error Detection....................................................................................3372 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR..............................................................................3372 WHEN INDICATED “U1000” OR “U1001” IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IS NORMAL...............3372 Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System...........................................................3373 ERROR EXAMPLE...............................................................................................3373 Example: TCM branch line open circuit...................................................................3373 Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit...................................................3374 Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) .......3375 Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit.............................................................3376 Self-Diagnosis..................................................................................................3377 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor..................................................................................3378 MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-II)...................................................................................3378 Without PAST............................................................................................3378 With PAST...............................................................................................3378 MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)...........................................................................3379 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW.........................................................................................3380 Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis........................................................................3380 How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart.......................................................................3380 Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart....................................................................................3381 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure.....................................................................................3382 INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER.....................................................................................3382 INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION.............................................................................3383 CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)...................................3384 CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)...........................................................3384 CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)...........................................................3385 CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET......................................................................................3386 Interview Sheet (Example)...............................................................................3386 CREATE DATA SHEET...........................................................................................3387 Create CONSULT-II Data Attachment Sheet.................................................................3387 Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet....................................................................3388 CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET......................................................................................3389 Print Diagnosis Sheet...................................................................................3389 Check of Received Data..................................................................................3389 DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE.......................................................................................3390 Present Error — Open Circuit —..........................................................................3391 Present Error — Short Circuit —.........................................................................3397 Past Error — Open Circuit —.............................................................................3398 Past Error — Short Circuit —............................................................................3404 CAN.....................................................................................................................3405 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................3405 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................3405 HOW TO USE THIS SECTION.............................................................................................3406 Caution.........................................................................................................3406 Abbreviation List...............................................................................................3406 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3407 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................3407 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3407 Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3407 Precautions for Harness Repair..................................................................................3407 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................3409 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor..................................................................................3409 MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-II)..............................................................................3409 ECM.....................................................................................................3409 AWD Control Unit........................................................................................3409 ICC Unit................................................................................................3410 TCM.....................................................................................................3410 BCM.....................................................................................................3410 Intelligent Key Unit....................................................................................3411 LDW Camera Unit.........................................................................................3411 Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................................3411 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)...........................................................3412 Driver Seat Control Unit................................................................................3412 IPDME/R................................................................................................3412 MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)......................................................................3413 Display Control Unit....................................................................................3413 CAN System Specification Chart..................................................................................3414 VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION................................................................3414 CAN Communication Signal Chart..................................................................................3415 TYPE 1/TYPE 2...............................................................................................3415 TYPE 3......................................................................................................3417 TYPE 4/TYPE 5...............................................................................................3419 TYPE 6......................................................................................................3422 Schematic.......................................................................................................3425 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3426 Interview Sheet.................................................................................................3429 Data Sheet......................................................................................................3430 CONSULT-II DATA ATTACHMENT SHEET............................................................................3430 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET...............................................................................3433 CAN System (Type 1).............................................................................................3434 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3434 CAN System (Type 2).............................................................................................3435 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3435 CAN System (Type 3).............................................................................................3436 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3436 CAN System (Type 4).............................................................................................3437 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3437 CAN System (Type 5).............................................................................................3438 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3438 CAN System (Type 6).............................................................................................3439 DIAGNOSIS SHEET.............................................................................................3439 Component Parts Location........................................................................................3440 Harness Layout..................................................................................................3440 Malfunction Area Chart..........................................................................................3441 MAIN LINE...................................................................................................3441 BRANCH LINE.................................................................................................3441 SHORT CIRCUIT...............................................................................................3441 Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector...................................................................3442 Main Line Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp.............................................3442 Main Line Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)..................3443 Main Line Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit....................3444 ECM Branch Line Circuit.........................................................................................3445 AWD Control Unit Branch Line Circuit............................................................................3445 Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit........................................................................3446 ICC Unit Branch Line Circuit....................................................................................3447 TCM Branch Line Circuit.........................................................................................3447 BCM Branch Line Circuit.........................................................................................3448 Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit.........................................................................3449 Intelligent Key Unit Branch Line Circuit........................................................................3449 LDW Camera Unit Branch Line Circuit.............................................................................3450 Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit.......................................................................3451 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Branch Line Circuit..................................................................3451 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit...............................................3452 ICC Sensor Branch Line Circuit..................................................................................3453 Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit....................................................................3454 IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit....................................................................................3454 CAN Communication Circuit.......................................................................................3455 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 lt..............................................................................................................................3458 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3458 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3462 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3462 General Precautions for Service Operations..........................................................................3462 HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -.................................................................................................3463 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3463 System Description..................................................................................................3463 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3463 HEADLAMP OPERATION..............................................................................................3464 Low Beam Operation..........................................................................................3464 High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation.................................................................3464 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3465 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3465 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)..............................................................................3465 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.........................................................................................3465 XENON HEADLAMP..................................................................................................3465 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3465 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3465 Schematic...........................................................................................................3466 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —...........................................................................................3467 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3471 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3473 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3473 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3473 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3473 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3475 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3475 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3475 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3475 Display Item List...........................................................................................3475 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3475 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3475 Display Item List...........................................................................................3475 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3477 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3477 Display Item List...........................................................................................3477 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3477 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3477 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3477 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3477 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3478 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3478 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3478 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (Both Sides)..................................................................3479 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (One Side)....................................................................3481 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)..................................................................3482 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (One Side)....................................................................3484 Headlamp RH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3486 Headlamp LH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3486 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF...........................................................................................3487 General Information for Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis............................................................3489 Caution:............................................................................................................3489 Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................3489 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3490 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING....................................................................................3490 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM..........................................................................................3490 ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)...................................................3491 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3491 HEADLAMP HIGH/LOW BEAM..........................................................................................3491 DAYTIME/PARKING LAMP............................................................................................3492 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP..........................................................................................3492 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP..........................................................................................3492 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3492 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3492 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3493 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3493 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3493 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3493 DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM....................................................................................................3495 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3495 System Description..................................................................................................3495 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3495 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION.........................................................................................3496 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3496 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION............................................................................................3496 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3496 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3496 Schematic...........................................................................................................3497 Wiring Diagram — DTRL —.............................................................................................3498 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3502 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3504 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3505 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3505 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT.........................................................................3506 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3507 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3507 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3507 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3507 Display Item List...........................................................................................3507 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3508 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3508 Display Item List...........................................................................................3508 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly.....................................................................3509 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3511 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3511 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3511 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3511 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.......................................................................................................3512 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3512 System Description..................................................................................................3512 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3512 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3513 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION............................................................................................3513 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3513 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3513 Major Components and Functions......................................................................................3513 Schematic...........................................................................................................3514 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —...........................................................................................3515 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3518 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3520 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3520 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3521 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS........................................................................................3521 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3521 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3523 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3523 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3523 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3523 Work Support Setting Item...................................................................................3523 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3523 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3523 Display Item List...........................................................................................3523 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3525 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3525 Display Item List...........................................................................................3525 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3525 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3525 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3525 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3525 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3526 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3526 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3526 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................3526 Lighting Switch Inspection..........................................................................................3527 Optical sensor System Inspection....................................................................................3527 Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor..........................................................................3529 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3529 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3529 HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL.................................................................................................3530 Schematic...........................................................................................................3530 Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —............................................................................................3531 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3534 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3534 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3534 Switch Circuit Inspection...........................................................................................3534 FRONT FOG LAMP..........................................................................................................3535 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3535 System Description..................................................................................................3535 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3535 FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION........................................................................................3536 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3536 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3536 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3536 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3536 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —............................................................................................3537 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3539 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3540 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3540 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3540 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3540 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3541 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3541 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)......................................................................3542 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side).......................................................................3544 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3545 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3546 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3546 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3546 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3546 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS....................................................................................3547 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3547 System Description..................................................................................................3547 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3547 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION...........................................................................................3548 LH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3548 RH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3548 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION...........................................................................................3548 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION...........................................................................3549 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3549 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3549 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3549 Schematic...........................................................................................................3550 Wiring Diagram — TURN —.............................................................................................3551 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3554 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3555 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3557 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3557 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3557 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3559 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3559 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3559 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3559 Display Item List...........................................................................................3559 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3559 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3559 Display Item List...........................................................................................3559 Turn Signal Lamps Do Not Operate....................................................................................3560 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate..............................................................................3562 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operate...................................................3563 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)...........................................................................3565 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)............................................................................3565 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp..................................................................3565 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...................................................................3565 Removal and Installation of Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit......................................................3565 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3565 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3565 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH.........................................................................................3566 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3566 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3566 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3566 HAZARD SWITCH...........................................................................................................3567 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3567 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3567 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3567 COMBINATION SWITCH......................................................................................................3568 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —...........................................................................................3568 Combination Switch Reading Function.................................................................................3569 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3569 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3574 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3574 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3574 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3574 Display Item List...........................................................................................3574 Combination Switch Inspection.......................................................................................3575 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3577 STOP LAMP...............................................................................................................3578 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3578 System Description..................................................................................................3578 Schematic...........................................................................................................3579 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —...........................................................................................3580 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3583 Stop Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3583 High-Mounted Stop Lamp..............................................................................................3585 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3585 Stop Lamp...........................................................................................................3585 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3585 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3585 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3585 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3585 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................................................................3586 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —...........................................................................................3586 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3587 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3587 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS...................................................................................3588 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3588 System Description..................................................................................................3588 OUT LINE........................................................................................................3588 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH....................................................................................3589 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3590 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3590 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3590 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3590 Schematic...........................................................................................................3591 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —...........................................................................................3592 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3597 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3598 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3598 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3598 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3598 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3598 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3599 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3599 Parking, License Plate and Side Marker Lamps Do Not Illuminate......................................................3600 Tail Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3604 Parking, License Plate, Side Maker and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)........................3606 License Plate Lamp..................................................................................................3607 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3607 Front Parking Lamp..................................................................................................3607 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3607 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3607 Tail Lamp...........................................................................................................3607 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3607 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3607 Front Side Marker Lamp..............................................................................................3607 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3607 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3607 Rear Side Marker Lamp...............................................................................................3607 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3607 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3607 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3607 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3607 REAR COMBINATION LAMP...................................................................................................3608 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3608 REAR FENDER SIDE (REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB)...................................................................3608 BACK DOOR SIDE (BACK-UP LAMP)...................................................................................3608 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3608 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3608 Rear Fender Side............................................................................................3608 Back Door Side..............................................................................................3608 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3608 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP......................................................................................................3609 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3609 System Description..................................................................................................3609 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................3610 SWITCH OPERATION................................................................................................3611 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION.......................................................................................3612 Without Intelligent Key System..............................................................................3612 With Intelligent Key System.................................................................................3613 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3614 Schematic...........................................................................................................3615 Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —...........................................................................................3617 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3625 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3626 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3627 CHECK FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.......................................................................3627 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3628 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3628 WORK SUPPORT (INT LAMP).........................................................................................3628 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3628 Display Item List...........................................................................................3628 DATA MONITOR (INT LAMP).........................................................................................3628 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3628 Display Item List...........................................................................................3629 ACTIVE TEST (INT LAMP)..........................................................................................3629 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3629 Display Item List...........................................................................................3629 WORK SUPPORT (BATTERY SAVER)....................................................................................3630 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3630 Display Item List...........................................................................................3630 DATA MONITOR (BATTERY SAVER)....................................................................................3630 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3630 Display Item List...........................................................................................3630 ACTIVE TEST (BATTERY SAVER).....................................................................................3631 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3631 Display Item List...........................................................................................3631 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate.........................................................................3631 Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate...................................................................................3633 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate..............................................................................3635 Ignition Key Hole Illumination Control Does Not Operate.............................................................3636 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate.......................................................................................3638 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate..............................................................................3639 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3639 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION (without Intelligent Key)........................................................3639 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION (with Intelligent Key)...........................................................3639 FRONT STEP LAMP.................................................................................................3640 REAR STEP LAMP..................................................................................................3640 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP...............................................................................................3640 VANITY MIRROR LAMP..............................................................................................3640 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3641 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................3641 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3641 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3641 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP...............................................................................................3641 Removal.....................................................................................................3641 Installation................................................................................................3641 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3642 Removal.....................................................................................................3642 Installation................................................................................................3642 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................3642 Removal.....................................................................................................3642 Installation................................................................................................3642 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3642 Removal.....................................................................................................3642 Installation................................................................................................3642 ILLUMINATION............................................................................................................3643 System Description..................................................................................................3643 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH.......................................................................3643 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3644 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3645 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3645 Schematic...........................................................................................................3646 Wiring Diagram — ILL —..............................................................................................3648 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3657 GLOVE BOX LAMP..................................................................................................3657 A/T DEVICE ILLUMINATION.........................................................................................3657 COIN BOX ILLUMINATION...........................................................................................3657 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3657 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH.....................................................................................3657 BULB SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................3658 Headlamp............................................................................................................3658 Exterior Lamp.......................................................................................................3658 Interior Lamp/Illumination..........................................................................................3658 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 lu..............................................................................................................................3660 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3660 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................3662 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3662 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3662 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3662 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3663 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3663 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3663 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3664 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3664 System Chart....................................................................................................3665 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3666 Inspection......................................................................................................3666 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3666 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3666 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3666 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3667 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3668 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3669 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3669 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3669 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3669 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3669 OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)............................................................................................3671 Components......................................................................................................3671 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3671 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3671 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3671 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3672 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3673 Components......................................................................................................3673 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3674 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3674 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3675 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3675 Relief Valve............................................................................................3675 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3675 2WD Models..............................................................................................3675 AWD Models..............................................................................................3675 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3675 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3676 Components......................................................................................................3676 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3676 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3676 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3676 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3676 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3676 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3676 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3677 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3677 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3678 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3678 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3679 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3679 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.........................................................................................3679 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3679 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3679 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3679 VK45DE..................................................................................................................3680 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3680 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3680 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3680 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3681 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3681 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3681 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3682 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3682 System Chart....................................................................................................3683 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3684 Inspection......................................................................................................3684 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3684 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3684 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3684 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3684 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3686 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3687 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3687 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3687 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3687 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3687 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3688 Components......................................................................................................3688 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3688 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3688 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3689 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3689 Relief Valve............................................................................................3689 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3689 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3689 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3690 Components......................................................................................................3690 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3690 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3690 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3690 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3691 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3691 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3691 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3691 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3691 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3692 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3692 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3693 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3693 OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................3693 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3693 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3693 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3693 ma..............................................................................................................................3694 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3694 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3696 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3696 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3696 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................3697 Explanation of General Maintenance..................................................................................3697 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................3700 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance................................................................................3700 Schedule 1..........................................................................................................3701 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3701 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3702 Schedule 2..........................................................................................................3703 EMISSION COMTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3703 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3704 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......................................................................................3705 Fluids and Lubricants...............................................................................................3705 Engine Oil Recommendation...........................................................................................3706 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio...................................................................................3706 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3707 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3707 Drive Belts Tension Adjustment......................................................................................3707 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.....................................................................3708 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.............................................................................................3708 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3708 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3708 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3709 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3710 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3710 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3711 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3711 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3711 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3712 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3712 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3712 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3713 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3713 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3713 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3713 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3714 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3714 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VK45DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3715 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3715 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................3715 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3715 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3716 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3716 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3717 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3718 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3718 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3718 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3718 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3719 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3719 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3719 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3720 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3720 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3720 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3720 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3721 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3721 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE............................................................................................3722 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3722 Checking A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3722 Changing A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3724 Checking Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3724 Changing Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3725 Checking Propeller Shaft............................................................................................3725 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3725 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3726 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................3726 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3726 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................3726 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................3728 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks................................................................................3728 Checking Brake Lines and Cables.....................................................................................3728 Changing Brake Fluid................................................................................................3728 Checking Disc Brake.................................................................................................3729 ROTOR...........................................................................................................3729 CALIPER.........................................................................................................3729 PAD.............................................................................................................3729 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage..................................................................................3729 STEERING GEAR...................................................................................................3729 STEERING LINKAGE................................................................................................3729 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines.............................................................................3730 Axle and Suspension Parts...........................................................................................3730 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................3731 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch............................................................................3731 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters......................................................3732 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3733 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3733 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VQ35DE)............................................................................3733 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VK45DE)............................................................................3733 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)..................................................................3733 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)..................................................................3733 RADIATOR........................................................................................................3733 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3733 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3734 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3734 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3734 WHEEL BALANCE...................................................................................................3734 pb..............................................................................................................................3736 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3736 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3737 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3737 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................................................3738 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3738 PEDAL STROKE....................................................................................................3738 INSPECT COMPONENTS..............................................................................................3738 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................3738 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL...................................................................................................3739 Components..........................................................................................................3739 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3739 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3739 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3740 PARKING BRAKE SHOE......................................................................................................3741 Components..........................................................................................................3741 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3741 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3741 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3742 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3743 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3744 Parking Drum Brake..................................................................................................3744 Parking Brake Control...............................................................................................3744 pg..............................................................................................................................3746 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3746 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................3748 Schematic...........................................................................................................3748 Wiring Diagram — POWER —............................................................................................3749 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION.............................................................3749 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”..........................................................3755 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”.....................................................3757 Fuse................................................................................................................3761 Fusible Link........................................................................................................3761 Circuit Breaker.....................................................................................................3761 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)............................................................3762 System Description..................................................................................................3762 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R..................................................................................3762 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL..................................................................................3762 Fail- Safe Control..........................................................................................3762 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL.........................................................................................3763 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3763 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3763 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction....................................................................3763 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)......................................................................................3764 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................3764 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................3764 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3764 Display Item List...........................................................................................3764 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3764 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3764 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3765 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3765 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3765 Auto Active Test....................................................................................................3766 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3766 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3766 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE.............................................................................3767 Concept of Auto Active Test.................................................................................3767 Schematic...........................................................................................................3769 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement.......................................................................................3770 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection............................................................................3771 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis).........................................................................3772 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R................................................................................3773 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3773 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3773 GROUND..................................................................................................................3774 Ground Distribution.................................................................................................3774 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3774 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3777 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3780 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3781 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3782 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3783 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3784 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................3786 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3787 HARNESS.................................................................................................................3788 Harness Layout......................................................................................................3788 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT......................................................................................3788 To Use the Grid Reference...................................................................................3788 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3789 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3790 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3793 Engine Compartment..........................................................................................3793 Passenger Compartment.......................................................................................3795 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3796 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3797 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3798 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3800 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3802 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................3804 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3805 FRONT DOOR HARNESS..............................................................................................3806 LH Side.....................................................................................................3806 RH Side.....................................................................................................3806 REAR DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3807 LH Side.....................................................................................................3807 RH Side.....................................................................................................3807 BACK DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3808 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)...................................................................................3809 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................................................................................3812 Electrical Units Location...........................................................................................3812 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................3812 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................3813 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................3815 HARNESS CONNECTOR.......................................................................................................3816 Description.........................................................................................................3816 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)............................................................................3816 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................3817 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................3818 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................3819 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3819 SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION)...........................................................................................3821 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3821 STANDARDIZED RELAY......................................................................................................3823 Description.........................................................................................................3823 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS................................................................3823 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS.....................................................................................3823 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B).........................................................................................3825 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3825 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................3826 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3826 pr..............................................................................................................................3828 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3828 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3829 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3829 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3829 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3830 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3830 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT...................................................................................................3831 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3831 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................3831 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3831 Propeller Shaft Runout Measuring Point......................................................................3831 Components..........................................................................................................3831 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3832 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3832 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3832 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3833 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT....................................................................................................3834 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3834 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................3834 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3834 Propeller Shaft Runout Measuring Point......................................................................3834 Components..........................................................................................................3835 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3836 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3836 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3837 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3838 Disassembly and Assembly of Center Bearing..........................................................................3839 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3839 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3840 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3841 General Specifications..............................................................................................3841 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3841 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3841 Journal Axal Play...................................................................................................3841 Propeller Shaft Runout..............................................................................................3841 ps..............................................................................................................................3842 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3842 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3844 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3844 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3844 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3844 Precautions for Steering System.....................................................................................3845 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3846 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3846 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3847 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3848 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3848 POWER STEERING FLUID....................................................................................................3849 Checking Fluid Level................................................................................................3849 Checking Fluid Leakage..............................................................................................3849 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System.......................................................................................3849 STEERING WHEEL..........................................................................................................3851 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3851 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION..............................................................................3851 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY....................................................................................3851 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL.....................................................................3851 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE...........................................................................3851 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..............................................................................3852 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3853 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3853 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3853 STEERING COLUMN.........................................................................................................3854 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3854 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3854 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3854 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3856 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3856 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3856 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3857 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3857 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3858 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3858 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.........................................................................................3859 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3859 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3859 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3859 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3861 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3861 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3862 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3862 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3863 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3865 Boot........................................................................................................3865 Rack........................................................................................................3865 Pinion Assembly.............................................................................................3865 Gear Housing Assembly.......................................................................................3865 Outer Socket and Inner Socket...............................................................................3865 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3866 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP.................................................................................................3871 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3871 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VQ35DE MODELS)....................................................................3871 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VK45DE MODELS)....................................................................3872 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3873 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3873 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3873 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3873 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3873 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3873 Disassembly and Assembly (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3874 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3874 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3874 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3874 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3875 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3875 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3875 Side Plate Inspection.......................................................................................3875 Flow Control Valve Inspection...............................................................................3875 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3875 Disassembly and Assembly (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3878 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3878 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3878 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3878 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3879 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3879 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3879 Side Plate Inspection.......................................................................................3879 Flow Control Valve Inspection...............................................................................3879 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3880 HYDRAULIC LINE..........................................................................................................3882 Components..........................................................................................................3882 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3885 VQ35DE MODELS...................................................................................................3885 VK45DE MODELS...................................................................................................3885 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3886 Steering Wheel......................................................................................................3886 Steering Angle......................................................................................................3886 Steering Column.....................................................................................................3886 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket..............................................................................3886 Steering Gear.......................................................................................................3887 Oil Pump............................................................................................................3887 Steering Fluid......................................................................................................3887 rax.............................................................................................................................3888 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3888 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3889 Caution.............................................................................................................3889 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3890 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3890 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3890 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3891 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3891 REAR WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE..............................................................................................3892 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3892 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION........................................................................................3892 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3892 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3892 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3892 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3893 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3893 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3893 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3894 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3894 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................3894 Bushing.....................................................................................................3894 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3894 Wheel Hub...................................................................................................3894 Axle........................................................................................................3894 Back Plate..................................................................................................3894 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3895 Bushing.....................................................................................................3895 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................3895 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................3895 REAR DRIVE SHAFT........................................................................................................3896 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3896 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3896 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3896 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3896 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3896 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3897 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3897 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3897 Final Drive Side............................................................................................3897 Wheel Side..................................................................................................3898 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3898 Shaft.......................................................................................................3898 Joint Sub-Assembly..........................................................................................3898 Sliding Joint Side (Housing)................................................................................3898 Ball Cage...................................................................................................3898 Steel Ball..................................................................................................3898 Inner Race..................................................................................................3898 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3899 Final Drive Side............................................................................................3899 Wheel Side..................................................................................................3900 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3902 Wheel Bearing.......................................................................................................3902 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................3902 rf..............................................................................................................................3904 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3904 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3905 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3905 Precautions.........................................................................................................3905 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3906 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3906 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3906 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3907 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3907 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3907 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3908 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3908 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3908 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3908 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3909 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3909 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3909 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3909 DOORS...........................................................................................................3909 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3910 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3910 SEATS...........................................................................................................3910 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3910 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3911 SUNROOF.................................................................................................................3913 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3913 System Description..................................................................................................3914 TILT UP / SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................3914 TILT DOWN / SLIDE OPEN OPERATION................................................................................3914 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3914 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3914 ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION.............................................................................................3915 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE..........................................................................................3915 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE........................................................................................3915 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3915 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3915 Wiring Diagram — SROOF —............................................................................................3916 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................3917 Terminals and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly............................................................3917 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3918 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3918 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................3918 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3918 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3918 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3918 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................3919 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................3919 Check Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit........................................................3920 Check Sunroof Switch System.........................................................................................3921 Check Door Switch...................................................................................................3923 Wind Deflector Inspection...........................................................................................3925 Link and Wire Assembly..............................................................................................3925 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................3925 LID WEATHERSTRIP OVERLAP ADJUSTMENT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT.............................................3926 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3926 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY...........................................................................................3928 Removal.....................................................................................................3928 Installation................................................................................................3929 GLASS LID.......................................................................................................3929 Removal.....................................................................................................3929 Installation................................................................................................3929 SUNSHADE........................................................................................................3930 Removal.....................................................................................................3930 Installation................................................................................................3930 WIND DEFLECTOR..................................................................................................3930 Removal.....................................................................................................3930 Installation................................................................................................3930 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY..........................................................................................3930 Removal.....................................................................................................3930 Installation................................................................................................3931 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 rfd.............................................................................................................................3932 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3932 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3933 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................3933 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3934 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3934 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3937 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3938 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3938 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................3939 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................3939 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................3940 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3940 DRAINING........................................................................................................3940 FILLING.........................................................................................................3940 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3940 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................3940 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3941 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3941 IDENTIFICATION STAMP OF REPLACEMENT FREQUENCY OF FRONT OIL SEAL.................................................3941 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3941 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3943 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3945 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3945 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3945 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3945 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3947 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3947 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3947 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3947 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3948 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3949 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3949 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3950 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................3950 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3950 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3951 Backlash....................................................................................................3952 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3953 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3953 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3953 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3955 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3957 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS...................................................................3957 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................3957 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................3958 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................3959 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3962 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3962 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3964 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3968 General Specifications..............................................................................................3968 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................3968 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................3968 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................3968 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................3968 BACKLASH........................................................................................................3968 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................3968 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................3968 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................3968 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................3969 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3969 rsu.............................................................................................................................3970 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3970 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3971 Cautions............................................................................................................3971 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3972 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3972 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3972 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3973 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3973 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................3974 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3974 INSPECTION OF BALL JOINT END PLAY...............................................................................3974 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.......................................................................................3974 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3974 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3974 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................3974 GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS.........................................................................3974 THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS...........................................................................................3975 CAMBER INSPECTION...............................................................................................3975 TOE-IN..........................................................................................................3975 Removal and installation............................................................................................3976 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3976 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3977 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3977 SHOCK ABSORBER..........................................................................................................3978 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3978 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3978 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3978 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3978 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3978 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3978 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3979 Bound Bumper and Bushing....................................................................................3979 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3979 SUSPENSION ARM..........................................................................................................3980 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3980 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3980 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3980 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3980 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3980 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3980 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3980 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3980 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3981 RADIUS ROD..............................................................................................................3982 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3982 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3982 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3982 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3982 FRONT LOWER LINK........................................................................................................3983 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3983 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3983 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3983 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3983 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING...........................................................................................3984 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3984 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3984 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3984 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3984 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3985 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3985 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3985 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3985 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3985 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER..................................................................................................3986 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3986 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3986 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3986 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3986 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3987 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)..........................................................................................3987 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3987 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3987 sb..............................................................................................................................3988 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3988 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3989 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3989 Precaution for Seat Belt Service....................................................................................3989 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................3989 SEAT BELTS..............................................................................................................3991 System Description..................................................................................................3991 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................3991 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP..........................................................................................3991 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt.........................................................................3991 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR............................................................................3992 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.......................................................................3992 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE...............................................................................3992 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE..........................................................................3992 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt..........................................................................3993 REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.............................................................................3993 INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR........................................................................3994 Seat Belt Inspection................................................................................................3994 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................3994 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3994 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION.......................................................................3995 Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)...................................3995 Stationary Inspection for ELR Function......................................................................3995 Stationary Inspection for ALR Function......................................................................3995 Moving Inspection for ELR Function..........................................................................3995 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE INSPECTION......................................................................3996 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM....................................................................3997 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3997 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3997 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3997 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT........................................................................................3998 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3998 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3998 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3998 sc..............................................................................................................................4000 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4000 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4002 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4002 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4003 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4003 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4003 BATTERY.................................................................................................................4004 How to Handle Battery...............................................................................................4004 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE............................................................................4004 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL......................................................................................4005 Sulphation..................................................................................................4005 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK..........................................................................................4005 Hydrometer Temperature Correction...........................................................................4005 CHARGING THE BATTERY............................................................................................4006 Charging Rates..............................................................................................4006 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Battery)............................................4007 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4008 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4009 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4009 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4009 STARTING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4010 System Description..................................................................................................4010 Wiring Diagram — START —............................................................................................4011 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4011 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4012 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Starting)...........................................4013 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4013 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4014 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4015 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4015 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4016 Check “S” Connector Circuit.................................................................................4016 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE.......................................4016 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Engine Models).....................................................................4017 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4017 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4017 Removal and Installation [VQ35DE Engine Models (2WD)]...............................................................4018 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4018 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4018 Removal and Installation [VQ35DE Engine Models (AWD)]...............................................................4019 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4019 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4019 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4020 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS (M002T85075)...............................................................................4020 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD) (S114-880)...........................................................................4021 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD) (S114-881)...........................................................................4022 Inspection After Disassembly........................................................................................4022 PINION/CLUTCH CHECK.............................................................................................4022 CHARGING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4023 System Description..................................................................................................4023 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...........................................................................................4023 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —...........................................................................................4024 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4024 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4025 Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester (Charging)...........................................4026 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART....................................................................................4027 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4028 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................4029 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4030 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Open)...........................................................................4030 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4031 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Short)..........................................................................4031 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4031 Check “S” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4031 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4..........................................................................................4032 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4032 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Engine Models).....................................................................4033 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4033 ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION....................................................................................4034 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4034 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Engine Models).....................................................................4034 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4034 ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION....................................................................................4035 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4035 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4036 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS (LR1110-716V)..............................................................................4036 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (A3TG0191).................................................................................4037 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4038 Battery.............................................................................................................4038 Starter.............................................................................................................4038 Alternator..........................................................................................................4038 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 se..............................................................................................................................4040 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4040 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4042 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4042 Service Notice......................................................................................................4042 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4043 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4043 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4043 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4044 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4044 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4044 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4045 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4045 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4045 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4045 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4046 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4046 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4046 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4046 DOORS...........................................................................................................4046 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4047 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4047 SEATS...........................................................................................................4047 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4047 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4048 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER..............................................................................................4050 System Description..................................................................................................4050 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................4050 AUTOMATIC OPERATION.............................................................................................4050 MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING.....................................................................4051 MEMORY SWITCH OPERATION.........................................................................................4052 ENTRY OPERATION.................................................................................................4052 EXITING OPERATION...............................................................................................4052 KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION......................................................................................4053 FAIL- SAFE MODE.................................................................................................4053 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE........................................................................................4053 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4054 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4055 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4055 Schematic...........................................................................................................4056 Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —...........................................................................................4058 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4070 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit..........................................4070 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit.........................................................4072 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4075 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4075 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION.........................................................................................4075 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND...................................................................................4076 CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)...............................................................................4078 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................4078 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..........................................................................................4078 Display Item List...........................................................................................4078 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4079 Selection from Menu.........................................................................................4079 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4080 Display Item List...........................................................................................4080 Check CAN Communication System......................................................................................4081 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................4081 Check Sliding Motor Circuit.........................................................................................4082 Check Reclining Motor Circuit.......................................................................................4084 Check Front Lifting Motor Circuit...................................................................................4085 Check Rear Lifting Motor Circuit....................................................................................4086 Check Telescopic Motor Circuit......................................................................................4088 Check Tilt Motor Circuit............................................................................................4089 Check Driver Side Mirror Motor Circuit..............................................................................4090 Check Passenger Side Mirror Motor Circuit...........................................................................4092 Check Sliding Sensor Circuit........................................................................................4094 Check Reclining Sensor Circuit......................................................................................4095 Check Front Lifting Sensor Circuit..................................................................................4096 Check Rear Lifting Sensor Circuit...................................................................................4097 Check Telescopic Sensor Circuit.....................................................................................4098 Check Tilt Sensor Circuit...........................................................................................4099 Check Driver Side Mirror Sensor Circuit.............................................................................4100 Check Passenger Side Mirror Sensor Circuit..........................................................................4101 Check Steering and Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit...............................................4103 Check Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Circuit.......................................................................4104 Check Sliding Switch Circuit........................................................................................4106 Check Reclining Switch Circuit......................................................................................4107 Check Front Lifting Switch Circuit..................................................................................4109 Check Rear Lifting Switch Circuit...................................................................................4110 Check Power Seat Switch Ground Circuit..............................................................................4111 Check Telescopic Switch Circuit.....................................................................................4112 Check Tilt Switch Circuit...........................................................................................4114 Check Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit.................................................4116 Check Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit.....................................................4118 Check A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit.....................................................................4120 Check Key Switch Circuit (With Intelligent Key).....................................................................4121 Check Key Switch Circuit (Without Intelligent Key)..................................................................4123 Check Seat Memory Switch Circuit....................................................................................4124 Check Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit............................................................................4126 Check UART Communication Line Circuit...............................................................................4127 Check Lumbar Support Circuit........................................................................................4129 POWER SEAT..............................................................................................................4131 Wiring Diagram — SEAT —.............................................................................................4131 HEATED SEAT.............................................................................................................4133 Description.........................................................................................................4133 Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —............................................................................................4134 FRONT SEAT..............................................................................................................4136 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4136 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4138 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4140 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4140 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4141 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4141 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4142 REAR SEAT...............................................................................................................4143 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4143 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4144 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4144 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4145 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4145 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4145 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4146 REMOVAL OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................4146 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER............................................................................4146 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 srs.............................................................................................................................4148 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4148 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4150 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4150 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service.................................................4150 Occupant Classification System Precaution...........................................................................4150 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4151 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4151 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS).....................................................................................4152 SRS Configuration...................................................................................................4152 Front Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner with Load Limiter.....................................................................4153 Front Side Air Bag..................................................................................................4153 Side Curtain Air Bag................................................................................................4153 Occupant Classification System (OCS)................................................................................4154 Passenger Air Bag Status Condition..................................................................................4154 Component Parts of Occupant Classification System...................................................................4154 Passenger Seatbelt Warning System...................................................................................4154 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4154 This system is composed of the following items..............................................................4154 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4155 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction......................................................................................4155 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..............................................................................................4155 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR..................................................4155 Information from Customer...................................................................................4155 Preliminary Check...........................................................................................4155 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4156 Component Parts Location............................................................................................4157 Schematic...........................................................................................................4158 Wiring Diagram — SRS —..............................................................................................4159 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4165 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II...................................................................................4165 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II...............................................................4165 From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode............................................................................4165 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode............................................................................4165 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS............................................................................4166 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)........................................................................4166 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................4166 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS.............................................................................4166 SRS Operation Check.................................................................................................4167 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4167 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode......................................4167 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II...................................................................................4169 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4169 DTC No. Index (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”).......................................................................4170 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4174 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)..................................................4176 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4176 DTC No. Index (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”).................................................4177 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II................................................................................4182 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6..........................................................................................4182 Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — Diagnosis Mode........................4182 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART...................................................................................4182 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF.........................................................4186 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7..........................................................................................4186 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON..........................................................4187 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8..........................................................................................4187 Trouble Diagnosis: Passenger Seatbelt Warning System................................................................4188 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE...................................................................................................4189 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4189 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4189 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4190 SPIRAL CABLE............................................................................................................4191 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4191 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4191 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4192 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE..........................................................................................4193 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4193 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4193 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4194 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE.............................................................................................4195 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4195 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4195 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4196 CRASH ZONE SENSOR.......................................................................................................4197 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4197 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4197 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4197 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR.........................................................................................4198 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4198 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4198 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4198 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER...........................................................................................4199 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4199 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT...................................................................................................4200 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4200 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4200 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4200 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO............................................................................................4200 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT.............................................................................4201 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4201 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................................4202 For Frontal Collision...............................................................................................4202 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)..........................................................................4202 For Side Collision..................................................................................................4204 WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:.......................................................4204 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:................................................................4204 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION).............................................................................4204 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 tf..............................................................................................................................4206 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4206 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4208 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4208 Precautions.........................................................................................................4208 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4209 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4210 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4210 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4212 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4213 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4213 TRANSFER FLUID..........................................................................................................4214 Replacement.........................................................................................................4214 DRAINING........................................................................................................4214 FILLING.........................................................................................................4214 Inspection..........................................................................................................4214 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL...................................................................................4214 AWD SYSTEM..............................................................................................................4215 Power Transfer Diagram..............................................................................................4215 System Description..................................................................................................4215 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4215 ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING....................................................................................4216 Operation Principle.........................................................................................4216 AWD CONTROL UNIT................................................................................................4216 AWD WARNING LAMP................................................................................................4217 AWD Warning Lamp Indication.................................................................................4217 System Diagram......................................................................................................4217 COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION.................................................................................4218 CAN Communication...................................................................................................4218 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4218 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4219 Fail-Safe Function..................................................................................................4219 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................4219 BASIC CONCEPT...................................................................................................4219 Location of Electrical Parts........................................................................................4220 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................4221 Wiring Diagram — AWD —..............................................................................................4222 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms................................................................................4225 AWD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values...............................................................4226 AWD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE...............................................................................4226 Specifications with CONSULT-II..............................................................................4226 CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)..............................................................................4227 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4227 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4227 SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE...........................................................................................4227 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4227 Display Item List...........................................................................................4227 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................4228 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4229 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4229 Display Item List...........................................................................................4229 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4230 Description.................................................................................................4230 Test Item...................................................................................................4230 AWD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER....................................................................................4230 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM............................................................................................4231 Power Supply Circuit for AWD Control Unit...........................................................................4231 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4231 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4231 AWD Control Unit....................................................................................................4232 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4232 ABS System..........................................................................................................4232 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4232 AWD Solenoid........................................................................................................4233 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4233 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4233 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................4235 AWD Actuator Relay..................................................................................................4236 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4236 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4236 Engine Control Signal...............................................................................................4237 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4237 CAN Communication Line..............................................................................................4237 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4237 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4238 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON..........................................4238 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4238 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds after Engine Started.............................................4238 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4238 Heavy Tight-Corner Braking Symptom Occurs When The Vehicle Is Driven and The Steering Wheel Is Tu...................4240 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4240 Vehicle Does Not Enter AWD Mode Even Though AWD Warning Lamp Turned to OFF..........................................4241 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4241 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly (When Flashing in Approx. 1 Minute and Then Turni...................4242 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly (When Continuing to Flash until Turning Ignition S...................4242 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4242 AWD CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................4244 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4244 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4244 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4244 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4245 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4245 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4245 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4245 REAR OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4246 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4246 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4246 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4247 AIR BREATHER HOSE.......................................................................................................4248 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4248 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................4249 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4249 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4249 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4249 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4250 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4250 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4251 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4251 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4255 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4255 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4256 Cases.......................................................................................................4256 Bearing.....................................................................................................4256 Shaft.......................................................................................................4256 Gears and Chain.............................................................................................4256 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4257 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4257 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4258 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4258 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4264 General Specifications..............................................................................................4264 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 wt..............................................................................................................................4266 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4266 INDEX FOR DTC...........................................................................................................4268 DTC No. Index.......................................................................................................4268 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4269 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4269 Precautions.........................................................................................................4269 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4270 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4271 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4271 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4271 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4272 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4272 ROAD WHEEL..............................................................................................................4273 Inspection..........................................................................................................4273 ALUMINUM WHEEL..................................................................................................4273 STEEL WHEEL (FOR EMERGENCY USE).................................................................................4273 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4274 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4274 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4274 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4274 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4275 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM.........................................................................................4276 System Components...................................................................................................4276 System Description..................................................................................................4276 TRANSMITTER.....................................................................................................4276 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER...................................................................................4276 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE).......................................................................................4277 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP..................................................................................4277 Low Tire pressure Warning Lamp Indication...................................................................4277 RUN-FLAT TIRE WARNING LAMP......................................................................................4277 Run-Flat Tire Warning Lamp Indication.......................................................................4278 DISPLAY UNIT....................................................................................................4278 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................4279 System Description..................................................................................................4279 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.......................................................................................................4280 Schematic...........................................................................................................4280 Wiring Diagram — T/WARN —...........................................................................................4281 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard...........................................................................4284 ID Registration Procedure...........................................................................................4285 ID REGISTRATION WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................4285 ID Registration without Transmitter Activation Tool.............................................................4286 Transmitter Wake Up Operation.......................................................................................4287 WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................................4287 Self-Diagnosis......................................................................................................4288 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4288 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4288 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DIAGNOSTIC CHART.................................................................4288 RUN-FLAT TIRE WARNING LAMP DIAGNOSTIC CHART.....................................................................4289 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................4290 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4290 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4290 WORK SUPPORT MODE...............................................................................................4290 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4290 Test Item...................................................................................................4290 ID Read.....................................................................................................4290 ID Regist...................................................................................................4290 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE....................................................................................4291 How to Erase Self- diagnostic Results.......................................................................4291 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4292 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4292 Display item List...........................................................................................4292 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4292 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4292 Test Item...................................................................................................4292 Flasher.....................................................................................................4293 Horn........................................................................................................4293 Warning Lamp................................................................................................4293 ID Regist Warning...........................................................................................4293 Flat Tire Warning...........................................................................................4294 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair......................................................4295 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................4295 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4295 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4296 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart......................................................................................4297 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS.............................................................................4298 Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)...................................................................................4298 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24...........................................................................4298 Transmitter - 1.....................................................................................................4298 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48...........................................4298 Transmitter - 2.....................................................................................................4299 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38...........................................................................4299 Vehicle Speed Signal................................................................................................4300 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52.........................................................................................4300 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4301 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...................................4301 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...........................................4301 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.............................................4302 Run-Flat Tire Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch is Turned On...............................................4303 Turn Signal Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...........................................................4303 ID Registration Can Not Be Completed................................................................................4303 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................................................4304 Transmitter.........................................................................................................4304 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4304 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4304 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4306 Road Wheel..........................................................................................................4306 Tire................................................................................................................4306 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80 ww..............................................................................................................................4308 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4308 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................4310 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4310 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM...........................................................................................4311 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location.....................................................................4311 System Description..................................................................................................4311 OUT LINE........................................................................................................4311 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION.......................................................................................4312 HIGH SPEED WIPER OPERATION......................................................................................4312 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4312 Wiper Dial Position Setting.................................................................................4313 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4313 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4313 MIST OPERATION..................................................................................................4313 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION..............................................................................................4314 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4315 Description.................................................................................................4315 Operation Description.......................................................................................4315 BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches...............................................................4315 Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch Turned to LOW Position)................................................4316 Operation Mode..............................................................................................4317 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4317 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4317 Schematic...........................................................................................................4318 Wiring Diagram — WIPER —............................................................................................4319 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4322 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4325 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4326 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4326 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4326 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4327 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4327 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4327 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4327 Display Item List...........................................................................................4327 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4327 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4327 Display Item List...........................................................................................4327 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4328 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4328 Display Item List...........................................................................................4328 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4329 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4329 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4329 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4329 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................4329 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4329 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4329 Front Wiper Does Not Operate........................................................................................4330 Front Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position........................................................................4332 Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate...............................................................................4333 Only Front Wiper Hi Does Not Operate................................................................................4335 Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate......................................................................4336 Front Wiper Interval Time Is Not Controlled by Vehicle Speed........................................................4336 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted...............................................4337 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates......................................................................4337 After Front Wiper Operate for 10 Seconds, They Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating the Opera...................4338 Front Wiper Does Not Stop...........................................................................................4339 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location................................4340 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4340 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4340 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Drive Assembly..............................................................4340 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4340 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4341 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Wiper Drive Assembly..............................................................4341 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4341 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4341 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4342 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4343 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Nozzle.....................................................................4343 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Tube Joint.................................................................4343 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4343 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4343 Inspection of Washer Nozzle.........................................................................................4344 CHECK VALVE.....................................................................................................4344 Inspection of Front Wiper and Washer Switch Circuit.................................................................4344 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper and Washer Switch...........................................................4344 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4344 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4344 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4344 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4344 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4345 Removal and Installation of Front and Rear Washer Pump..............................................................4345 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4345 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4345 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM............................................................................................4346 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4346 System Description..................................................................................................4346 REAR WIPER OPERATION............................................................................................4346 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4347 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4347 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4347 BCM WIPER SWITCH READING FUNCTION...............................................................................4347 Wiring Diagram — WIP/ R —...........................................................................................4348 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4350 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4352 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4352 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4352 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4353 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4353 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4353 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4353 Display Item List...........................................................................................4353 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4354 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4354 Display Item List...........................................................................................4354 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate.........................................................................................4354 Rear Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position.........................................................................4356 Only Rear Wiper ON Does Not Operate.................................................................................4357 Only Rear Wiper INT Does Not Operate................................................................................4357 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates.......................................................................4357 Rear Wipers Do Not Stop.............................................................................................4357 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location..................................4358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4358 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Blade........................................................................4358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4359 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor........................................................................4359 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4359 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4359 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4360 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4360 Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle...........................................................................4361 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4361 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4361 Check Valve.........................................................................................................4361 Inspection of Front Wiper and Washer Switch Circuit.................................................................4361 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper and Washer Switch............................................................4361 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4361 Removal and Installation of Front and Rear Washer pump..............................................................4361 POWER SOCKET............................................................................................................4362 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —...........................................................................................4362 Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket – 1..................................................................4363 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4363 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4363 Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket – 2..................................................................4363 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4363 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4363 Removal and Installation of Rear Power Socket.......................................................................4363 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4363 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4363 Removal and Installation of Luggage Room Power Socket...............................................................4364 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4364 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4364 HORN....................................................................................................................4365 Wiring Diagram — HORN —.............................................................................................4365 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4366 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4366 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4366 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 75 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 79 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 80
Contact us: [email protected]
https://vimeo.com/873252121?share=copy
PLEASE NOTE:
- This is not a physical manual but a digital manual – meaning no physical copy will be couriered to you. The manual can be yours in the next 2 mins as once you make the payment, you will be directed to the download page IMMEDIATELY.
- This is the same manual used by the dealers inorder to diagnose your vehicle of its faults.
- Require some other service manual or have any queries: please WRITE to us at [email protected]
S.V
